JP2019193719A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To prevent history information from becoming difficult to check.SOLUTION: When an initialization process (e.g., RAM clear 1) is executed, a setting change process (e.g., a setting change process) for changing the setting value can be executed. In addition, when the initialization process is executed and the setting change process is not executed, it is possible to specify that the initialization process has been executed to be displayed (e.g., displaying RAM clear log information). When the initialization process and the setting change process are executed, it is possible to specify that the setting change process has been executed to be displayed without performing a display that can specify the initialization process has been executed (e.g., only log information indicating the end of setting change is displayed).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-33

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine capable of playing a game.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result in the variable display device, the game state (game There is a machine configured to give a predetermined game value to a player by changing the state of the machine (specifically, the state where the gaming machine is controlled) (so-called pachinko machine).

  In addition, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player starts variable display of identification information by the variable display device by operating the start lever, and the player By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time determined in advance from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. In accordance with the display result derived when the game is stopped, a winning occurs, a predetermined game medium determined in advance according to the winning is paid out, and when a specific winning occurs, a player is given a predetermined gaming value as a gaming state. There is one that is configured to be in a state to be given to (so-called slot machine).

  The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes an advantageous state for a player who easily wins a ball or an advantageous state for a player. It is to generate a right and to be in a state where conditions for paying out a prize ball are easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of special symbols (identification information) that is started in the variable display device based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. If this happens, a “big hit” will occur. The derived display is to finally stop and display a symbol (final stop symbol). When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round. A game in a round may be referred to as a round game.

  In the variable display device, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol in the left, middle, and right symbols) continue for a predetermined period of time and stop and shake in a state that matches the specific display result. It can be a big hit before the final result is displayed because it is moving, scaling, or deforming, or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the displayed symbol is switched. An effect performed in a state where the sex is continued (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes “out of” and the variability display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  Some of such gaming machines are configured to be able to display abnormal history information related to games. For example, Patent Document 1 describes that all detected error information is stored and can be confirmed on an error information history screen.

JP 2017-131768 (paragraph 0132, FIG. 47)

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, unnecessary information is also displayed as history information, and it is difficult to check the history information.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent history information from being difficult to confirm.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player. In addition, a storage area (for example, the RAM 102) that can store information generated during the game, and history display means (for example, a first display) that can display the history information (for example, log information) of the abnormality relating to the game in an identifiable manner 2 stage control CPU012IW120b executing step 012IWS464, S467) and initialization processing execution means (for example, RAM clear 1) for initializing the storage contents of the storage area (for example, RAM clear 1) The game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the part that executes step 012IWS051 in the CPU 103) and the initialization process are executed. Steps in setting change processing execution means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) that can execute setting change processing (for example, setting change processing) for changing the setting value in the case of being performed. 012 IWS034 to S042), and the history display means can display in an identifiable manner that the initialization process has been executed when the initialization process has been executed and the setting change process has not been executed. Yes (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step 012IWS809 and executes step 012IWS464 to display RAM clear log information as shown in FIG. 8-41 (E)), and initialization When the process and setting change process are executed, it can be identified that the initialization process has been executed. The fact that the setting change process has been executed can be displayed without being indicated (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step 012IWS811 and executes step 012IWS464, for example, FIG. As shown in 8-40 (D), only log information indicating the end of the setting change is displayed). According to such a configuration, since unnecessary information is not displayed, it is possible to prevent the history information from being difficult to confirm.

(Means 2) In the means 1, setting confirmation processing execution means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) capable of executing the setting confirmation processing (for example, setting confirmation processing) for confirming the setting value. ), And the history display means can display the history information in an identifiable manner based on the detection of the player's action during the execution of the setting confirmation process (for example, the first step). 2 effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step 012IWS457 when Y is set at step 012IWS452 and Y is set at step 012IWS456, thereby displaying the setting confirmation display as shown in FIGS. 8-40 to 8-43. Based on the push of the push button 31B, the maintenance mode menu is displayed. -Menu screen is displayed) it may be configured so. According to such a configuration, history information can be suitably confirmed.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or 2, the game control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) that performs control related to the game and the presentation based on the information from the game control means And an effect control means (for example, second effect control CPU 012IW120b) for controlling, and the game control means can output initialization information (for example, an initialization designation command) indicating that the initialization process has been executed. In addition, setting change information (for example, a setting change command) indicating that the setting change process is executed can be output (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs steps 012IWS027, (S052), the effect control means includes a history display means, and the history display means Depending on whether or not the setting change information is output, different history information can be specified (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b can perform step 012IWS810, Y at step 012IWS807 and Y at step 012IWS808). By executing S811, the log information of the end of the setting change is recorded based on the reception of the initialization designation command and the setting change command, and as shown in FIG. 8-40 (D), the maintenance history screen May be displayed). According to such a configuration, history information can be suitably confirmed.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, an abnormality detecting means (for example, steps 012IWS107 and S111 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) capable of detecting a predetermined abnormality (for example, a left-handed notification state) is executed. And a history storage means (for example, a log area of the RAM 012IW122b) capable of storing history information, and the abnormality detection means has a first abnormality state (eg, a predetermined importance level for a predetermined abnormality) , A first left-handed notification state) and a second abnormal state (for example, a second left-handed notification state) indicating that the predetermined abnormality is higher in importance than the first abnormal state. The storage means does not store information indicating that the first abnormal state is detected as history information, but stores information indicating that the second abnormal state is detected as history information. (For example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b records the log information only when the second left-handed notification state occurs by executing step 012IWS117). Also good. According to such a configuration, history information can be suitably stored.

(Means 5) Information output means (for example, game) capable of outputting set value information (for example, set value command) that can specify which set value is set in any one of means 1 to means 4 The control microcomputer 100 includes steps 012IWS047 and S178 for executing the suggestion effect execution means based on the set value information input from the information output means (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, during game) The suggestion effect and the big hit suggestion effect) can be executed (for example, the part in which steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906 are executed in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b). The first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect or the game in the third effect mode) The middle suggestion effect, the big hit suggestion effect by the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the first effect mode, the game suggestion effect, the big hit suggestion effect) can be executed, When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs step 012IWS514, By performing S709 and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, the suggestion effect in the game, and the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode may not be executed). According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic part 012IW. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a back perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine with the gaming machine frame open. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 012IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 012IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 012IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process performed at the time of power activation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an initial appearance determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start waiting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pre-game suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game suggestion effect determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect determination table during a game. It is a flowchart which shows an example of big hit effect determination processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit suggestion effect determination table, an accessory effect determination table, and a light-guide plate effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an ending effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an error alerting | reporting process. It is a flowchart which shows an error alerting | reporting process. It is a flowchart which shows an error alerting | reporting process. It is a flowchart which shows an error alerting | reporting process. It is a flowchart which shows a maintenance mode process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting change time recording process. It is a flowchart which shows a present time setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting timing of the present time. It is a flowchart which shows a power interruption date recording process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the recording timing of the log information of a power interruption date. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the display screen in maintenance mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the display screen in maintenance mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the display screen in maintenance mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the display screen in maintenance mode. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for game machines in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for game machines in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the maintenance log | history screen in the modification 4.

(Basic explanation)
First, a basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also a configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device.

  In a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of special symbols (also called special figures) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Examples of the fluctuation include an update display of a plurality of symbols, a scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the case of a special symbol or a variation of a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes an aspect in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”. There may be one kind of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols. The variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down) Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special display game and the variable display of the decorative symbols executed in synchronism are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, there may be provided a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display for which execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of stored memories. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved memory number. The total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs lit. To display the first reserved memory number, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first start winning opening that is maintained in a certain open state in which a game ball can always enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number of (for example, three) prize balls are paid out and the first special game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second start winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball apparatus 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is off, the tip of the movable wing piece Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball enters the closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable blade piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting ball). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the one having an electric tulip type accessory as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places in the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning ports 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning entrance. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the big prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When game balls enter the big prize opening, for example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, and the general prize opening 10, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning at the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port starting port) is also referred to as starting winning.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and variably displays normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. A normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a general game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the usual game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general figure hold display unit 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general figure hold storage, which is the number of general figure games that are being executed, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates in accordance with the performance is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 that is operated by a player or the like in order to launch a game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31 </ b> A and the push button 31 </ b> B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation, etc.), but other detection means may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a rotation operation by the player to the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the previous execution of the usual game, etc. (when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 but the usual game based on the pass cannot be executed immediately). The usual game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. When the “normal hit” is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When a game ball enters the first start winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  When a game ball enters (wins) a start winning opening during a period during which a special figure game is being executed or during a period where a big hit game state or a small hit game state, which will be described later, is controlled (a start win has occurred) In the case where the special game based on the start prize cannot be immediately executed), the special game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In a special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, “7”, the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, it will be a “hit” symbol. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. In addition, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “-”) different from the big hit symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it is “lost”.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes an elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds), and a timing until the number of game balls that have entered the winning prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. One cycle in which the grand prize opening is in an open state is called a round (round game). In the big hit gaming state, it can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or twice).

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  Note that a “big hit” is set as the big hit type. For example, a number of types of opening of the big prize opening (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) and gaming state after the big hit gaming state (described later, normal state, short-time state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and depending on them Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, or a jackpot type that has few prize balls or hardly obtains prize balls.

  In the small hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening of the big prize opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big prize opening is also the same. Etc.), the grand prize opening is opened. Similar to the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, depending on the big hit type, it may be controlled to a short time state or a probable change state.

  In the short-time state, control (short-time control) is executed to shorten the average special figure change time (period during which the special figure is changed) compared to the normal state. In the short-time state, by reducing the average normal map change time (period in which the normal map is changed) from the normal state, or by improving the probability of “per normal map” in the normal game, than the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The short-time state is a state advantageous for the player because the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time reduction control, probability variation control is executed in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is likely to be a “hit” in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  The short-time state or the probability change state continues until any one end condition such as that a predetermined number of special game has been executed and the next big hit game state has been established. A game whose end condition is that a predetermined number of special game has been executed is also referred to as a number of cuts (short time cut, number change probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as a big hit gaming state advantageous for the player, a short-time state, a probable change state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary game is “per ordinary figure”. The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game is “big hit” is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after power-on) This is the same control as when the process was not executed.

  A state in which the probability variation control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not being performed is also referred to as a low probability state. The state where the time reduction control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and the state where the time reduction control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the short-time state is a low-accuracy base state, the probability variation state is a high-accuracy high-base state, the normal state is a low-accuracy-low base state, and so on. The highly accurate state and the low base state are also referred to as a highly accurate low base state.

  After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game is “small hit” is controlled continuously (however, “small hit” occurs) If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there is no “small hit” as the display result of the special game.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big prize opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game ball may be controlled to be in a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 This may be performed by turning on / off the light, and the operation of the movable body 32.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special game or the first game is produced as an effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game. Corresponding to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable decorative symbol display ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end thereof, the variable display mode of the decorative design may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for decorative symbols that have not been stopped yet when the decorative symbols stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of a jackpot combination described later. It is a mode that is continuing.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the above-described reach mode during variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special figure game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) according to the production mode becomes “big hit” (also called the big hit reliability or the big hit expectation). Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach with higher hit reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a predetermined decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the symbol is “big hit”). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed together on predetermined active lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of “probability big hit”, which is controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state, odd numbers of decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and after the big hit gaming state, the probable change state is entered. In the case of a “non-probable big hit (normal big hit)” that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”, etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as probability variation symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-probable variation symbols (normal symbols). After becoming a reach mode with a non-probable variation pattern, a promotion effect that finally becomes a “probability large hit” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special game is “small hit”, as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative symbol (for example, “ 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eye are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes “big hit” of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state) and when it becomes “small hit” A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode, but the non-reach combination fixed display pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach lose”) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be “non-reach lose”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the predetermined reach combination (“reach loss”) that is not a big hit combination is displayed as the variable display display result of the decorative design. In other cases, the fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as “definitely”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is “reach lose”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). As other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during variable display of decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display being executed, and a pre-read notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative design during the variable display of the decorative design and then restarting the variable display, the single variable display is made to appear as a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo-continuous effect may be executed.

  Even during the big hit game state, the big hit effect for informing the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state may be executed. In addition, during the small hit game state, the small hit effect during the small hit game state is executed. In addition, the big hit game in the small hit game state and a part of the big hit type (a big hit type of the big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent gaming state is a high probability state) By executing a common effect with the state, the player may not know whether the current state is the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, a common effect is executed after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that it is not possible to identify whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. May be.

  Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a relay board 15 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are disposed on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-described game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of holding), execution of a general game (including management of holding), jackpot A gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, and the like). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and the like. And a random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as later-described variation patterns, later-described effect control commands, and various tables referred to when making various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period even when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold). And an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display hold device 25B, the second hold display device 25B, the general-purpose hold display device 25C, and the like, and a solenoid drive signal).

  The switch circuit 110 is configured to detect detection signals (game balls pass or not) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch is turned on is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Through the transmission of the detection signal, the passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) sends an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. 12 is supplied. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The production control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later) )), A game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of a big prize opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), a command specifying an error, and the like.

  The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives production control commands, and produces productions (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. (Including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, notification of power failure recovery, etc.).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when an operation by the player is detected and indicating the operation content as appropriate). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the audio designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the ramp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the ramp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and lamp on / off.

  The production control CPU 120 executes sound output, lamp on / off control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.) and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random values (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects in an updatable manner. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  For example, the I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits an input port for receiving an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, ramp signal). Output port.

  Substrates other than the main board 11 such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14 are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets prohibition of interruption (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting for making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop process immediately before it becomes unable to operate due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of error detection codes (checksum, parity bits, etc.) and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags and various timer states) for progressing the game, but also the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, when the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped and the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt processing described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which instruct | indicates the recovery | restoration from a power interruption to the production control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, an effect control command for designating a backed-up gaming state before power interruption, or an effect control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power recovery from the power interruption has been made or is being recovered from the power interruption. To display the screen. The effect control CPU 120 may perform an appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. Whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Subsequently, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrence of jackpot) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of special symbol game execution and suspension, control of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, control of a gaming state, etc. Later).

  Following the special symbol process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process for each timer interruption, thereby managing the execution and holding of the ordinary game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), The opening control of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on “per figure” is enabled. The ordinary game is executed by driving the normal symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure display number is displayed by turning on the ordinary symbol display device 25C.

  After executing the normal symbol process, a process when a power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, or the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting occurrence of a start winning, storing hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold memory number is executed. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process for determining in advance a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the hold information and the number of reserved memories, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating determination results such as the occurrence of a start prize, the number of reserved memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of a start winning set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S <b> 110 to S <b> 120) of the special symbol process, transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is determined based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when “big hit” is assumed Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a confirmed special symbol (any one of the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1”, and the special symbol normal process ends. Note that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in order of winning (also referred to as winning order digestion).

  When various determinations are made based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which determination values to be compared with random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, one of multiple types of variation patterns can be selected using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of prior determination of whether or not the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. The process to decide on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  Fluctuation patterns include special game execution time (special graphic variable time) (also the execution time of decorative symbol variable display), decorative symbol variable display mode (such as presence / absence of reach), and variable decorative symbol display The content of the production (the type of reach production, etc.) is designated and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure It is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the time elapsed since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol variation process is terminated.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and stops (displays) the definite special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. The process to set for is included. When the display result is “big hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “lost”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is “small hit” or “losing”, the gaming state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability variation state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for jackpots includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state and setting the open winning opening based on the fact that the display result is “hit” It is. When the big prize opening is in an open state, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period in which the big winning opening is opened or an upper limit execution number of rounds is set corresponding to which of the big hit types. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit release pre-processing is finished.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the prize winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the prize winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the jackpot release is terminated.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit-opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is opened has reached the set upper limit execution number, and when the upper limit execution number is reached, the big hit game state The process etc. which perform the setting for ending are included. When the round execution count does not reach the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, whereas when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution count, the special figure process flag value is updated. The value is updated to “7”. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the processing after the big hit release ends.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. This includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the jackpot end processing ends.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the fact that the display result is “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit gaming state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening process ends.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. This small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and displays the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing a predetermined operation check is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and awaits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S75, an effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, and the movable body 32 Control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to an effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11 are performed on the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices.

  Following the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Another process may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the hold memory number specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative design in the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative design (determined decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set production control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”, and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, driving the movable body 32, outputting sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and issuing a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output, is executed. After such effect control is performed, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or a command specifying stop display of the final decorative symbols is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what has been done, the definite decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the definite decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has been received from the main board 11. When an effect control command designating starting a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state is received, if the command designates the start of a big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is set to “6”. Update to "". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit. Also, when the command waiting time of the command has passed without receiving a command specifying that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is started, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “losing”. Thus, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Also, in the small hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command to end the small hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hitting effect processing ends.

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set content. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the small hit end effect process is ended.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the jackpot game state, and executes various effect controls in the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command for ending the big hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing. 7 ", and the big hit effect processing is terminated.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and performs various effects control of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but encloses the game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winnings. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “−”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbols are stopped in response to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by installing it in a storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, the comparison expression (expression such as “high”, “low”, “difference”, etc.) of various ratios such as the performance execution ratio is that the ratio of one is “0%”. May be included. For example, one of the ratios is “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation regarding feature 012IW)
Next, the feature part 012IW will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature part 012IW. In this feature part 012IW, as shown in FIG. 8A, instead of the pass gate 41 shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed through the passing gate 012IW041 is detected by the gate switch 012IW021 (see FIG. 8-2).

  In addition, in this feature part 012IW, as shown in FIG. 8A, instead of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 shown in FIG. A variable winning device 012IW007a and a second special variable winning device 012IW007a constituting the second large winning opening are provided. A game ball won in the first special variable winning device 012IW007a is detected by the first count switch 012IW023a (see FIG. 8-2). In addition, the game ball won in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is detected by the second count switch 012IW023b (see FIG. 8-2). Furthermore, a so-called V winning area is provided in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b, and a game ball that has won the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is a V winning switch 012IW024 (FIG. 8-). 2).

  In this example, the game ball that has won the general winning opening 10 is detected by the winning opening switch 012IW010a (see FIG. 8-2).

  In this example, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) inputs a detection signal from the gate switch 012IW021 (when the game ball passes through the pass gate 012IW041), the game ball passes through the pass gate 012IW041. Control is performed to transmit a gate passage designation command for designating that the second has passed to the second effect control board 012IW12b. Further, when the game control microcomputer 100 receives a detection signal from the winning opening switch 012IW010a (when a game ball wins the general winning opening 10), a winning opening that designates that the game ball has won the general winning opening 10 is given. Control is performed to transmit a winning designation command to the second effect control board 012IW12b.

  Further, in this example, when the game control microcomputer 100 receives a command indicating that a full state of the hitting ball supply tray (lower plate) has been detected from, for example, a payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board. Then, control is performed to transmit a full tank detection command indicating that the full supply state of the hitting ball supply tray (lower plate) is detected to the second effect control board 012IW12b. The payout control microcomputer, for example, confirms whether or not a detection signal from a full tank switch for detecting a full tank state provided in the hit ball supply tray (lower pan) is input. A full tank state of the supply tray (lower plate) can be detected.

  In this example, since the passing gate 012IW041 is provided in the right area of the game area, when the game state is controlled to the high base state, the player aims at the right side of the game area. It is advantageous to perform an operation (so-called right-handed operation). Also, in this example, the first special variable prize-winning device 012IW007a and the second special variable prize-winning device 012IW007b are provided in the right area of the game area, so that the player performs a right-handed operation during the big hit game Is advantageous.

  On the other hand, in this example, when the gaming state is not controlled to the high base state (that is, controlled to the low base state) and is not in the big hit game, the player aims at the left side of the gaming area. In this case, it is advantageous to perform the launching operation (so-called left-handed operation) because it is easy for the game ball to win the first start winning opening.

  In this feature unit 012IW, for example, a 16-round jackpot game is executed in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, and the first special variable winning device 012IW007a is used in the first to third rounds and the fifth to the 16th rounds. It is controlled to open until a predetermined period (29.5 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls wins, and in the fourth round, the second special variable prize is won. The device 012IW007b is controlled to be in an open state until a predetermined period (29.5 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls wins. Then, on the condition that the game ball has won in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b in the fourth round, the gaming state is controlled to the probabilistic state after the big hit game is over. In this example, in the case of a probable big hit, winning in the V winning area is a condition, but the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is opened over a relatively long period (29.5 seconds in this example). Therefore, it is controlled to be in a probable state after the big hit game is finished.

  In the feature unit 012IW, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs the special symbol process process (step S25) during the big hit release process (step S115) and the big hit release post-process (step S116). When it is detected that a game ball has won in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b (specifically, when an ON signal is input from the V winning switch 012IW024), the gaming ball is placed in the V winning area. Control is performed to transmit a V prize designation command designating that a prize has been won (that a V prize has occurred) to the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b.

  In the case of a non-probable big hit (usually big hit), for example, 16 rounds of big hit games are executed, and the first special variable winning device 012IW007a is executed in the first to third rounds and from the fifth to the 16th rounds. Is controlled to be open until a predetermined period (29.5 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number of game balls (10 in this example) wins, and in the fourth round, the second special variable The winning device 012IW007b is controlled to be in an open state until a very short period (in this example, 0.1 second) elapses. In this example, in the case of a normal big hit, the second special variable prize-winning device 012IW007b is controlled to be in the open state in the fourth round as in the case of the probable big hit, but in an extremely short period (in this example, 0.1 Since it is released only for a second), it is rarely controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, the feature unit 012IW includes a first effect control board 012IW12a and a second effect control board 012IW12b instead of the effect control board 12 shown in FIG.

  A first effect control CPU 012IW120a, ROM012IW121a, RAM012IW122a, display control unit 012IW123, and I / O012IW125a are mounted on the first effect control board 012IW12a. The first effect control CPU 012IW120a has a function of receiving a command from the second effect control CPU 012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b and executing the effect based on the received command. In this example, detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B are input to the first effect control CPU 012IW120a mounted on the first effect control board 012IW12a. In this example, it is assumed that the first effect control CPU 012IW 120a sets a timer interrupt time of 10 ms at the start of power supply, generates a timer interrupt every 10 ms, and executes various processes.

  The second effect control board 012IW12b is equipped with a second effect control CPU 012IW120b, a ROM012IW121b, a RAM012IW122b, a random number circuit 012IW124, an I / O012IW125b, and a real-time clock 012IW126. The second effect control CPU 012IW120b has a function of executing effect control main processing, receives an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, and based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing an effect control process process (however, it controls the effect means such as the actual image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, and the input means such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B) The control of the part that receives the input from is performed on the first effect control CPU 012IW120a side). In this example, it is assumed that the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets 10 ms as the timer interrupt time when the power supply is started, generates a timer interrupt every 10 ms, and executes various processes.

  Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has a function of recording predetermined log information in a log area provided in the RAM012IW122b using the date / time information output from the real-time clock 012IW126. In this feature 012IW, the RAM 012IW122b is backed up by a backup power supply mounted on a power supply board (not shown), and even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, at least a predetermined period is recorded in the log area. Log information is retained.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 012IW001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a game board that constitutes a game board surface. (Gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 012IW003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device. Further, the gaming machine frame 012IW003 has a glass door frame 012IW003a having a glass window between a door opening position where the front side of the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened around the left side and a door closing position where the front surface is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 012IW003a so that the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 012IW003a is closed.

  Further, the gaming machine frame 012IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a shop clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and players other than the shop clerk can open the gaming machine frame 012IW003 and glass. The door frame 012IW003a cannot be opened.

  The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 012IW201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 012IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, which will be described later.

  The setting switching main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the setting key 012IW051, is housed in the board case 012IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting key 012IW051 does not have to open the board case 012IW201. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 012IW201 so that the operation can be performed.

  Since the board case 012IW201 having the setting key 012IW051 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. Operation is possible by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using the door key. In addition, since the setting key 012IW051 requires an operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like of the game hall, only the store clerk possessing the setting key can be operated. The setting key 012IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation to be described later. In the feature unit 012IW, the door key and the setting key are illustrated as separate keys. However, a single key may be used.

  The substrate case 012IW201 is provided with a display monitor 012IW029 and a display changeover switch 012IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 012IW029. The display monitor 012IW029 and the display changeover switch 012IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged at the upper left part of the board case 012IW201. That is, the display monitor 012IW029 and the display changeover switch 012IW030 are arranged on the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized in the board case 012IW201. Since the main board 11 is not visible when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is viewed is the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 012IW003 opened. It is the front when visually recognizing and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made common.

  As described above, the setting key 012IW051 in the feature part 012IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 There is a possibility that the setting key 012IW051 may be operated from the inside of the game island to be installed. Therefore, in this feature part 012IW, as shown in FIGS. 8-3 and 8-4, the right side part of the board case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 at the right end of the outer frame 012IW001a when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. A security cover 012IW500A is attached to cover the rear side of the camera. This security cover 012IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member provided with a short piece 012IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 012IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 012IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The plate-shaped synthetic resin material has permeability. The vertical dimension of the short piece 012IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 012IW201. The security cover 012IW500A is fixed to the right end portion of the outer frame 012IW001a via the front end portion of the short piece 012IW500Aa.

  As shown in FIG. 8-3, the long piece 012IW500Ab abuts (or closes) from the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the right portion of the board case 012IW201 in a state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. Accordingly, the right side portion of the substrate case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For this reason, the setting key 012IW051 becomes inoperable by the long piece 012IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-4, in the state in which the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the setting key 012IW051 moves together with the gaming machine frame 012IW003 to move away from the long piece 012IW500Ab. When the covering state by 012IW500Ab is released, the state becomes operable.

  That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature part 012IW is maintained in a restricted state in which the operation to the operation part including the setting key 012IW051 is restricted by the security cover 012IW500A when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. On the other hand, in a state in which the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the restriction state by the security cover 012IW500A described above is released, and the setting key 012IW051 is allowed to be operated.

  Since the board case 012IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 012IW051 when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. The setting value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 012IW051 unless the game machine frame 012IW003 is opened by the door key.

  However, in the state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on the gaming island (not shown) of the game hall, even if the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, for example, with other pachinko gaming machines adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1, A fraudulent member such as a wire or a cell board is inserted from between a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a gaming device such as a card unit installed between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a setting key 012IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Since there is a possibility that an illegal act such as changing the setting value by operating is performed, the operation to the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 is restricted by the security cover 012IW500A in a state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. By maintaining the regulated state, it is possible to suitably suppress the cheating.

  Even in a restricted state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed and the right side of the back surface of the board case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 is covered by the security cover 012IW500A, the board case 012IW201 is accommodated through the transparent security cover 012IW500A. Since the main board 11 and the like can be seen through, it is possible to easily check the state of the mounting surface on the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted and the seal seal.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area, thereby executing various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

  In the feature part 012IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and for determining the normal figure display result The numerical data indicating the random value MR4 and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of the MR4 are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating by software using a different random counter in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIG. 8-5 and FIG. 8-6, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also has table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), a display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), and FIG. In addition to the display result determination table (set value 3) shown in -5 (C), the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), the big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), the small hit variation pattern determination table ( 8), a loss variation pattern determination table, a general diagram display result determination table (not illustrated), a general diagram variation pattern determination table (not illustrated), and the like are included.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature part 012IW is configured such that the winning probability (outtake rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process, the winning probability (outtake rate) of the jackpot is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. . The set value consists of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 being the lowest payout rate, and the higher the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3, the higher the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in order of 2, 3, the advantage increases stepwise. In the feature unit 012IW, the winning probability per winning is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
8-5 (A) to (C) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to the respective set values. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variation special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to fluctuation display, and the variation special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for big hit and a determination value for small hit are set.

  As shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the variable display target. If the set value is “2” or “3”, the winning combination is won with a lower probability (1/320 at non-probable change, 1/32 at probable change). On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, and the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are “2” and “3”. It is supposed to be. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the subject of variable display, the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/320 at non-probable change, 1/32 at non-probable change) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display To do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hits, so that the first special symbol is small with a higher probability (1/2) than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display. Winning is won.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 is used and the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. Win a big hit with a higher probability (1/300 for non-probable change, 1/30 for probable change) than in some cases. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are “1” and “3”. It is supposed to be. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the subject of variable display, the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/300 at non-probable change, 1/30 at probable change) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display To do. On the other hand, since half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hits, there is a higher probability than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value Is won with the same probability (1/2) as when “1” and “3”.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 8C, when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. Winning a big hit with a higher probability (1/280 at non-probable change, 1/28 at probable change) than in the case of “2”. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, and the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are “1” and “2”. It is supposed to be. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the target of variable display, the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/280 at non-probable change, 1/28 at probable change) as when the first special symbol is the target of variable display To do. On the other hand, since half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hits, there is a higher probability than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value Is won with the same probability (1/2) as when “1” and “2”.

  In other words, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and the MR1 value corresponds to any one of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to (C). When the winning judgment value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). Further, when MR1 coincides with any hit determination value corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to (C), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to (C) indicate the probability (proportion) of being a big hit and the probability (proportion) of being a small hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state. However, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to the small hit gaming state, but stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  Note that, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-5, the case where the winning probability of the small hit is the same regardless of the set value is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, as in the case of the jackpot winning probability, the winning probability may be increased as the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. Further, in this case, the setting difference in the winning probability for the small hit may be the same ratio as the setting difference in the winning probability for the big hit. Specifically, if the winning probability per hit at the set value “1” is 1/100, the winning probability per hit at the set value “2” is designed to be 1 / 93.75, You may set so that the winning probability per small hit at setting value “3” may be 1 / 87.5.

  Further, in a gaming machine that does not provide a small hit, the configuration indicated by the feature unit 012IW may be applied.

  In the feature unit 012IW, the CPU 103 determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to (C). The big hit determination table and the small hit determination table are provided separately, and the big hit determination is performed depending on whether the first special symbol is a variable display or the second special symbol is a variable display regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. A common table may be used, and the small hit determination may be performed using separate tables for the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the first and the second.

  Further, in this feature part 012IW, the case where the advantage increases in the order of setting value “1” <setting value “2” <setting value “3” is shown. May be configured to change. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine that is configured to be controlled to a high probability / high base state, to maintain a high probability / high base state until the next big hit, and to obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this case, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-5, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a period in which a small hit is likely to occur with a high probability of 1/2 and a winning ball can be easily obtained. Therefore, unlike the other gaming states, in the specific gaming state (in this example, high probability / high base state), conversely, a big hit is unlikely to occur (high probability / high base state is likely to continue). The value “1” may be set to the highest advantage.

  In addition, for example, when applied to a gaming machine in which the probability variation state ends based on the execution of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times (the probability variation end count) after being controlled to the probability variation state (high probability state), the same probability variation If it is the number of times of completion, the probability variation continuation rate (recession rate) may increase in the order of setting value “1” <setting value “2” <setting value “3”.

  In this feature part 012IW, a total of three set values of 1 to 3 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 8-6 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the feature part 012IW, when the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening (that is, when the first special symbol variation display is performed), A common jackpot type determination table is used for determining the jackpot type using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). Although it is configured to use, different tables may be provided so that the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different.

  In the jackpot type determination table, the jackpot type is selected from the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table that is referred to to determine either.

  In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), a determination value corresponding to the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type is assigned for each set value. The ratio of the determined judgment value is shown. In other words, the ratio of which of the big hit type A to the big hit type C is determined for each set value is shown. Note that a determination value corresponding to a random number is actually assigned to a loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 and a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. In order to simplify the above, the ratio of the assigned judgment value is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the set value is “1”, the ratio determined to the jackpot type C is high and the set value is “2”. When the ratio determined for the jackpot type B is high and the set value is “3”, the determination value is assigned so that the ratio determined for the jackpot type A is high.

  Here, the jackpot type in the feature part 012IW will be described with reference to FIG. 8-6 (B). In the feature part 012IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. It has been.

  The fanfare period is, for example, a period during which the big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b side. Thereafter, a fanfare effect is performed as an effect operation for notifying the start of the big hit gaming state.

  The interval period is, for example, a period during which the big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the big prize opening is opened on the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b side. This is a period in which an interval effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the start of the next round after the round is completed.

  The ending period is, for example, a period in which the big hit end process of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the end of the big hit gaming state is notified on the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b side. This is a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 8-6 (B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the case of jackpot type A, then are long in the case of jackpot type B, and are the longest in the case of jackpot type C. It is set to be shorter.

  As described above, in the feature unit 012IW, when the set value is “1”, the ratio of being determined as the big hit type C is high, and therefore the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, since the ratio determined as the big hit type A is high, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  The feature unit 012IW is configured such that the winning probability (outrun rate) of the jackpot increases in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”, but at the same time, the set value is “1” The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period is increased in the order of “<2” <“3”. With such a configuration, when the winning probability of winning the jackpot (race rate) is high, the average duration of the fanfare period, interval period and ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and gambling Can be prevented from becoming too high.

  This feature unit 012IW is configured to be able to execute a jackpot suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value during the jackpot game, and this jackpot suggestion effect is fanfare period, interval period and ending. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the interest of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be enhanced. Further, by directing the player's interest to the big hit suggestion effect, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the length of each period.

  In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is commonly executed.

  In addition, in this feature unit 012IW, a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending period are set for each jackpot type, and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined for each set value is different, so that the jackpot When the winning probability (race rate) is a high setting, the average period of the fanfare period, interval period, and ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. The fanfare period, interval period, and ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, any one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods with different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table in which determination values are set so that the ratio of selection of the fanfare period, interval period, and ending period in which relatively long periods are set is increased in the order of jackpot type A <B <C. Thus, the average value of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be increased in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  In this feature unit 012IW, in both cases of jackpot type A to jackpot type C, the time-shortening control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature unit 012IW). The game ends when the figure game is executed or when the big hit game state is entered before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time-shortening control and probability variation control is different for each big hit type. Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot type, high-accuracy control and time reduction control that are executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are continuously executed until the jackpot is generated again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. You may be made to do. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot gaming state is a so-called consecutive resort state that occurs continuously without going through the normal state. The feature unit 012IW is configured so that the ratio of winning big hits is different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability variation continues for each set value. You may make it a rate (renso ratio) differ.

  Also, in this feature part 012IW, there is no difference in the advantage (for example, the number of rounds in the big hit game, presence / absence of time reduction control and probability variation control, the number of control, etc.) in the big hit type A to the big hit type C, the fanfare period, the interval Although the average period of the period and the ending period are different, for example, for each jackpot type, the number of rounds in the jackpot game, the presence or absence of short-time control and probability variation control, the number of times of control, and the advantage differ You may do it. In this case, the effect during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

  The feature unit 012IW exemplifies a mode in which the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is determined from the big hit type A, the big hit type B, and the big hit type C according to the set value that has been set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value, there is one jackpot type that cannot be determined among jackpot type A, jackpot type B, jackpot type C, or There may be multiple. In other words, depending on the set value, the determination rate of the jackpot type is different, either one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific jackpot type is 100% Included in determining by percentage.

  Also, in this feature part 012IW, the fanfare period, interval period and ending period differ according to the jackpot type, but this is not the only case, and the fanfare period, interval period and ending period are not limited to the jackpot type. You may comprise so that a period may differ. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period corresponding to the set value may be determined uniformly according to any of the set values “1” to “3”. Further, for example, depending on whether the set value is “1” to “3”, the lottery process is performed with the selection probability according to the set value, and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are determined. May be.

  As described above, in the feature unit 012IW, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variation display result is a jackpot differs according to the set value that has been set, so that the game entertainment can be improved. .

  In the feature unit 012IW, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random value for determining the jackpot type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a special figure display result. You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for determination.

  Further, in this feature unit 012IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous for the player (the big hit probability and the small hit probability are increased, and the big hit type C as the big hit type is easily determined). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

  In addition, in the feature unit 012IW, although the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gameability itself does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of this, the gameability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the game performance (so-called probability variation loop type) in which the big hit probability in the normal state loops at a rate of 1/320 and the probability variation state is 65%, When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the big hit probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in a specific round during the big hit game. The game state after the big hit game is controlled to be a probable state based on passing through the predetermined count switch, while the rate at which the game ball passes through the count switch during the big hit game differs according to the big hit type If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50. As a gameability (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on the fact that the game ball passes through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 (during time-short control). Good. Furthermore, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as 1 to 3 and the game is the same, the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than those in the case where these set values are any one of 1 to 3. Thus, a setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

  Further, in this way, when the gameability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different applications. Specifically, in the above-described example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is used as an effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch). When the set value is 2 or 3, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball). The game state may be used as a switch for controlling the game state to a probable change state or a big hit game state based on passing through the count switch.

(Small hit type judgment table)
FIG. 8C is an explanatory diagram illustrating a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. 8-6 (C), in this feature part 012IW, small hit types A to C are provided as small hit types. As shown in FIG. 8-6 (C), in the feature unit 012IW, the determination ratios of the small hit types A to C are the same regardless of which of the setting values “1” to “3”.

  In addition, in this feature part 012IW, regardless of which of the small hit types A to C, the open period and the number of open times of the big winning opening during the small hit game are the same, and the advantageous degree in the game is the same. .

(Fluctuation pattern judgment table)
The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination. The variation pattern is selected from among the above-described plural types according to the predetermined determination result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern determination table, the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, and the fluctuation display result is “small hit”. Are prepared in advance, and a loss variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “lost”. .

(Loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 8-7 is an explanatory diagram of a loss variation pattern determination table. In this feature unit 012IW, a period (hereinafter also referred to as a special period) from when the setting change is performed at the time of power-on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), and other periods ( Hereinafter, it is configured to use different loss variation pattern determination tables.

  Specifically, in the special period, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), and in the non-special period, the fluctuation pattern is shown in FIG. 8-7 (B). The variation pattern is determined using the second loss variation pattern determination table. In the feature unit 012IW, the period from when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) is a special period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as a special period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Further, a special period may be used in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9 am to 11 am) using the real-time clock 012 IW 126 or the like. In addition, a period until the first big hit is generated may be a special period.

  Each of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-7 (A) and (B) is a normal reach loss or a super reach loss in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, since the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value is suggested depending on the frequency of execution of normal reach and super reach.

  Also, the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The determination values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between them becomes large. With such a configuration, in the special period, it becomes easier to recognize the difference in the frequency at which normal reach is executed than in the non-special period (that is, it becomes easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value). And can enhance the entertainment interests of the game.

  For example, the fluctuation pattern with super reach (or a specific fluctuation pattern) is determined at the same rate regardless of the setting value (or regardless of the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may make it do. By doing so, the execution rate differs only for a specific fluctuation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the setting value, and the setting value is suggested depending on the frequency with which the specific fluctuation pattern is executed. become. On the contrary, the selection ratio of the variation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be varied according to the set value.

  Also, the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-7 (A) and (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss when it is other than non-reach loss depending on the set value. The determination values are assigned so that the ratios (that is, the normal reach loss: super reach loss balance) are different. Specifically, in the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the ratio of the normal reach loss is remarkably increased in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3” (this example In the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), the normal reach loss is performed in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. The ratio is slightly higher (in this example, it is higher by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency of normal reach loss and super reach loss. Further, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

  In this feature unit 012IW, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at different ratios according to the set values. This is because the execution ratios of the normal reach lose and the entire super reach lose differ depending on the set values. This is a concept including that the execution ratios of normal reach loss and super reach loss are different, and that only the normal reach loss is different depending on the set value.

  This feature unit 012IW displays a common background image on the image display device 5 when any of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-7 (A) and (B) is used. Then, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 3, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Note that the dedicated background image may be displayed only during the special period or the period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 times). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in a special period or a period from when the power is turned on until a variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 times).

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the example of the feature unit 012IW. For example, a special variation pattern that suggests a set value (for example, a variation pattern of a variation display of a decorative design that is different from a normal variation pattern and has a set value of 1 or 2) May be selected only in the special period, and the special variation pattern may be selected only in the special period. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to provide a motivation to play a game during a special period, and to enhance the gaming interest.

(Non-reach loss variation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 8-8 is an explanatory diagram of a non-reach loss variation pattern determination table. In the feature unit 012IW, a plurality of types of non-reach losing variation patterns having different variation times are provided, and when the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach losing, the non-reach losing A to C are further determined. It is configured. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, the non-reach loss A to C is included in the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-7, and any of non-reach loss A to C, normal reach loss, and super reach loss You may comprise so that it may determine.

  As shown in FIG. 8-8, in the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table, when the set value is “1”, the ratio determined as non-reach lose C (change time of 7 seconds) is high, and the set value is “2”. ", The ratio determined to non-reach loss B (fluctuation time 8 seconds) is high, and when the set value is" 3 ", the ratio determined to non-reach loss A (fluctuation time 9 seconds) is high. A judgment value is assigned to.

  In the feature unit 012IW, when the setting value is “1”, since the ratio determined as non-reach loss C is high, the variation time at the time of non-reach loss is likely to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, since the ratio determined as non-reach loss A is high, the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average variation time becomes longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  The feature unit 012IW is configured such that the winning probability (outrun rate) of the jackpot increases in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”, but at the same time, the set value is “1” ”<“ 2 ”<“ 3 ”in order, the average variation time becomes longer. With such a configuration, when the probability of winning the big hit (race rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling ability becomes too high. Can be prevented.

  This feature unit 012IW is configured so that the average variation time varies depending on the set value by varying the ratio of non-reach loses A to C having different variation times. A plurality of types of variation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) may be provided so that the variation times are different, and the selected ratio may be different depending on the set value. In addition, when multiple types of variation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the variation time is different, it is possible to vary the display time of the decorative symbols, such as shaking display of high-speed variation display, etc. It is desirable that there is no difference in appearance.

  In addition, the feature unit 012IW is configured such that the average variation time varies depending on the set value. However, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, a final decorative symbol (final pattern) may be used depending on the set value. The period during which the stop symbol) is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (outtake rate) of the jackpot is high, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed, that is, to delay the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

  In addition, in this feature unit 012IW, the winning time of the big hit is configured by setting the variation time for each of the non-reach loses A to C and the ratio of the non-reach loses A to C being determined for each set value. When the probability (race rate) is a high setting, the average variation time is increased, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the variation time of each variation pattern for each set value May be set to be fixed, and the variation time may be longer when the winning probability (the winning rate) of the jackpot is higher.

  Note that in the feature unit 012IW, a shortening variation pattern having a variation time shorter than that of other variation patterns is provided. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach losing (variation time 1.5 seconds) shorter than non-reach losing A (variation time 9 seconds) is provided. The shortening variation pattern is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit or is close to the upper limit, the state is canceled and the variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. Therefore, in the feature unit 012IW, the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or larger than the predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Regardless of the configuration of the feature unit 012IW, the variation time for the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number or more may be varied according to the set value.

(Setting confirmation process, setting change process)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature part 012IW will be described. FIGS. 8-9 to 8-11 are flowcharts showing the game control main process in the feature part 012IW. In the feature unit 012IW, the processes in steps IWS001 to S002 are the same as the processes in steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

  When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 determines the time until the effect control means (specifically, the first effect control CPU 012IW120a and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. An effect control means activation waiting timer for measurement is set (step 012IWS003). In this case, sufficient time is set in the production control means activation waiting timer until the first production control CPU 012IW 120a and the second production control CPU 012IW 120b are activated after the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer (step 012IWS004), and checks whether the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after subtraction is 0 (step 012IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 012IWS004, and the processes of steps 012IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 012IWS006.

  By executing the processes of steps 012IWS003 to S005, the process after step 012IWS006 is executed after waiting until the first effect control CPU 012IW120a and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b are activated, and the setting value is changed and confirmed. Initialization, recovery processing, etc. are executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a set value command, an initialization designation command, and a recovery command, which will be described later, are transmitted before the first effect control CPU 012IW120a and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b are activated. It is possible to prevent the command from being missed.

  Next, the CPU 103 resets a RAM clear flag indicating that the clear switch has been pressed when power is supplied to the gaming machine (step 012IWS006).

  In this example, the RAM clear flag is not cleared in the power-off process described later (see step 012IWS031), but the RAM clear flag is once cleared by step 012IWS006 when power is supplied to the gaming machine, and then the clear switch is set. If it is, the case where it is configured to newly set the RAM clear flag (see steps 012IWS016 and S022) is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, if the RAM clear flag is cleared when the power-off process is executed, and the clear switch is set when the game machine is turned on, the RAM clear flag is newly set. Also good.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same processing as in step S4 (step 012IWS007). Specifically, in step 012IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 012IWS012.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data by the same process as step S5 (performed using the error detection code), and the data is normal. (Step 012IWS008). In step 012 IWS 008, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or checksum whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping power supply. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 012IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 012IWS010.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 012IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 checks whether the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the setting values “1” to “3”. (Step 012IWS009). If the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is any of the setting values “1” to “3”, the process proceeds to step 012IWS011.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (N in Step 012IWS008) or when the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is determined to be a value other than the setting values “1” to “3” (Y in Step 012IWS009) The CPU 103 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS010). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS012.

  When the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is any of the setting values “1” to “3” (N in step 012IWS009), the CPU 103 is executing the setting change process for changing the setting value. It is confirmed whether or not a setting changing flag indicating that the above is set (step 012IWS011). If the setting changing flag is set (step 012IWS011; Yes), that is, if power interruption or the like occurs during the setting value change and power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the process proceeds to step 012IWS012.

  In step 012IWS012, CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from door open sensor 012IW090 is on (step 012IWS012). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 012IW051 is on (step 012IWS013). If the setting key 012IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 012IWS014). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes RAM clear 2 processing (step 012IWS015).

  In this example, RAM clear processing includes RAM clear 1 processing (see step 012IWS051) and RAM clear 2 processing (see step 012IWS015) executed when a RAM abnormality occurs.

  In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102 and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the area other than the area for storing the performance display information such as the link ratio, the role ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value in the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared. Information for performance display such as role ratio and base, and information on set values are not cleared but are retained. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 1 process is referred to as a clear storage area 1.

  In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, areas other than the area for storing performance display information such as the link ratio, role ratio, and base in the storage area of the RAM 102 are cleared, and the performance display such as the link ratio, role ratio, and base is displayed. This information is not cleared but retained. In the RAM clear 2 process, the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 2 process is referred to as a clear storage area 2. Therefore, in this example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 2 process is wider than the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 1 process.

  Then, the CPU 103 sets a RAM clear flag (step 012IWS016), and proceeds to step 012IWS025. The RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102.

  On the other hand, if the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is OFF (N in Step 012IWS012), the setting key 012IW051 is OFF (N in Step 012IWS013), or the output signal from the clear switch is OFF ( In step 012IWS014 N), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a set value abnormality error command to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b (step 012IWS017).

  Next, the CPU 103 proceeds to a loop process of steps 012IWS018 to S020. In the loop process, the CPU 103 executes a 4 ms wait process for measuring a 4 ms wait time (step 012 IWS 018). When the wait time of 4 ms elapses, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 012IWS019 and performs a predetermined error display (step 012IWS019). For example, the CPU 103 performs control to display a display (for example, display of “E”) indicating a RAM abnormality error on the display monitor 012IW029. In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to externally output a security signal to an external device such as a hall computer via an external terminal board (step 012 IWS020). And the process after step 012IWS018 is repeatedly performed.

  As a result of the processing of steps 012IWS007 to S020, in this feature unit 012IW, when the backup RAM is not normal (N in steps 012IWS007 and S008, Y in step 012IWS009), or an interruption of power occurs during the setting change. In the case (Y of step 012IWS011), the RAM is cleared on condition that the setting key 012IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the gaming machine frame 012IW003 opened, and the setting values after step 012IWS025 Can be changed. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened and the setting key 012IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, the loop process is executed, the setting value cannot be changed, and the game control does not proceed.

  If the setting change flag is not set (step 012IWS011; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 012IWS021). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 sets a RAM clear flag (step 012IWS022).

  In this example, by executing the processing of step 012IWS022 and step 012IWS016, the RAM clear flag is set when the clear switch is first turned on when the game machine is powered on. After that, there are multiple times to confirm whether or not the clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on until the timer interrupt is set and the timer interrupt process (game control process) is started. However, instead of directly checking the state of the clear switch, it is determined whether or not the clear switch is detected when the power is turned on by checking whether or not the RAM clear flag is set. (Refer to Step 012 IWS025, S034, S048).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is on (step 012IWS023). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 012IW051 is on (step 012IWS024). If the setting key 012IW051 is on, the CPU 103 checks whether the RAM clear flag is set (step 012IWS025). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a setting confirmation command indicating execution of setting confirmation processing for confirming the setting value to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b (step 012IWS026). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS030.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a setting change command indicating execution of setting change processing for changing the setting value to the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b ( Step 012 IWS027). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (step 012IWS028). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (that is, if abnormality of the RAM 102 is detected), the CPU 103 stores it in a setting value determination buffer (storage area for storing the current setting value provided in the RAM 102). The setting value is set to “1” (step 012IWS029). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS030. At this time, the CPU 103 resets the RAM abnormality flag.

  Note that, on receiving the setting confirmation command and the setting change command, the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b perform control to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed (for example, Then, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a decorative light emitter such as a decoration LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner. In this case, on the side of the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b, the operation button for effects such as the push button 31B is pressed to display “maintenance mode” or the like and shift to the maintenance mode. You may comprise. “Maintenance mode” means, for example, the date / time setting of the real-time clock 012IW 126, the occurrence history of various errors (recording when and what type of error occurred), the setting change history (when the setting value was changed and after the change) This is a mode in which the recording of the set value) can be confirmed. When the setting key 012IW051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are finished, the maintenance mode is also finished.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a 4 ms wait process for measuring a 4 ms wait time (step 012 IWS 030). When the wait time of 4 ms elapses, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 012IWS031 and executes a power-off process (step 012IWS031). In step 012 IWS031, in the power-off process, the CPU 103 executes a process of detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off process, when the CPU 103 detects that a power-off signal has been output, the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop process for storing necessary data (eg, backup flag, checksum) in the backup RAM area. To do.

  Next, the CPU 103 identifies the setting value stored in the setting value determination buffer, and displays the identified setting value on the display monitor 012IW029 (step 012IWS032). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to externally output a security signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external terminal board (step 012IWS033).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 012IWS034). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 012IWS043 as it is.

  If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a setting changing flag (step 012IWS035), and starts the setting changing process. Next, it is confirmed whether or not an initial set flag indicating that a value has already been set in the clear switch buffer for the first time since the gaming machine is turned on is set (step 012 IWS036). The clear switch buffer is a buffer provided in the RAM 102 for setting the clear switch input state (whether it is in an on state or an off state). For example, the clear switch buffer is set to a value of “1” if the clear switch is on, and set to a value of “0” if the clear switch is off. If the initial setting completed flag has been set (if the gaming machine has already been set to the initial clear switch buffer since the power was turned on), the process proceeds to step 012IWS039.

  If the initial set flag has not been set (that is, the value has not been set in the clear switch buffer even after the gaming machine is turned on), the CPU 103 sets the clear switch buffer to the ON state. A value (for example, “1”) is set (step 012 IWS037). Further, the CPU 103 sets an initial set flag (step 012IWS038).

  Next, the CPU 103 sets the value currently set in the clear switch buffer in the previous clear switch buffer (step 012IWS039). The previous clear switch buffer is a buffer that is provided in the RAM 102 and sets the clear switch input state (on state or off state) confirmed last time (4 ms before in this example). For example, the previous clear switch buffer is set to a value of “1” if the previously confirmed clear switch is on, and set to a value of “0” if it is off.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms the current input state of the clear switch, and sets the current input state of the clear switch in the clear switch buffer (step 012 IWS040). Next, the CPU 103 sets the value previously set in the clear switch buffer to the off state (eg, “0”) and sets the value set to the clear switch buffer to the on state (eg, “1”). (Step 012IWS041).

  If the value previously set in the clear switch buffer is off and the value set in the clear switch buffer is on, the CPU 103 updates the set value displayed on the display monitor 012IW029. At the same time, it is displayed and stored in the set value determination buffer (updated with respect to the already stored set value) (step 012IWS042). For example, when “1” is displayed as the setting value on the display monitor 012IW029, the display on the display monitor 012IW029 is updated to “2”, and the setting value “2” is stored in the setting value determination buffer. When “2” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 012IW029, the display on the display monitor 012IW029 is updated to “3” and the set value “3” is stored in the set value determination buffer. When “3” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 012IW029, the display on the display monitor 012IW029 is updated to “1”, and the set value “1” is stored in the set value determination buffer.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 012IW051 is on (step 012IWS043). If the setting key 012IW051 remains on, the process proceeds to step 012IWS030, and the processing of steps 012IWS030 to S043 is repeatedly executed, and the setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the setting key 012IW051 is off, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, and proceeds to step 012IWS044.

  If the RAM clear flag is not set by executing the above-described steps 012IWS025 to S043 (that is, the clear switch is not turned on when the gaming machine is turned on) (steps 012IWS025 and S034). N), a setting confirmation command is transmitted (step 012IWS026), and only the setting confirmation processing (particularly step 012IWS032) is performed, and the setting change processing is not performed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear flag is set (that is, when the clear switch is turned on when the gaming machine is powered on) (step 012IWS025, Y of S034), a setting change command is transmitted (step 012IWS027). At the same time, a setting confirmation process (especially step 012IWS032) and a setting change process (especially 012IWS035-S042) are performed.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 30 seconds) in the security information timer for setting the security signal output period (step 012 IWS044). In this example, when the setting confirmation process or the setting change process is executed when the gaming machine is turned on, the process of step 012IWS033 is executed to start external output of the security signal. In step 012IWS044, the security information timer is set, and the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the value of the security information timer, so that the security signal continues until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. And output externally.

  On the other hand, in this example, the security signal is output to the outside even when a RAM abnormality occurs by executing the process of step 012IWS020, but in this case, the power supply to the gaming machine is reset. The security signal is continuously output until it is sent.

  Next, the CPU 103 resets the setting changing flag (step 012IWS045). Further, the CPU 103 deletes the setting value displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 (step 012IWS046). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set set value to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b (step 012IWS047).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 012IWS048). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to the recovery process of step 012IWS049. In the feature unit 012IW, the processes in steps 012IWS049 and S050 are the same as the processes in steps S6 and S7 shown in FIG.

  If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear 1 process and performs a process of clearing the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 (012IWS051). In the feature unit 012IW, the processes in steps 012IWS052 to S055 are the same as the processes in steps S9 to S12 shown in FIG.

  FIGS. 8-12 is explanatory drawing which shows the process performed at the time of power activation. In this feature 012IW, as shown in FIG. 8-12, when the setting key 012IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (and the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is turned on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, a setting confirmation process (especially step 012IWS032) and a setting change process (especially 012IWS035 to S042) are executed and an initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 012IWS051)) is executed, and the clear switch is off. For example, only the setting confirmation process (particularly step 012IWS032) is executed and the recovery process (step 012IWS049) is executed. Also, when the setting key 012IW051 is off at power-on, if the clear switch is on, only initialization processing (RAM clear 1 processing (step 012IWS051)) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, Only the recovery process (step 012IWS049) is executed.

  Next, a display mode of the display monitor 012IW029 in the setting confirmation process and the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-13 (A) and 8-13 (B), when the power is turned off (turned off) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game hall, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced. When the supply stops, the display on the display monitor 012IW029 ends. Note that when the big prize opening is open, such as during a big hit game or a small hit game, at the timing when the power is turned off, the supply of power to the solenoid 82 is stopped to close the big prize opening.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (C), when a store clerk or the like of the game hall turns on the power while operating the clear switch (Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 012IW051 is turned on. The CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation process on the condition that the setting value is set, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 012IW029.

  In the state where the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 as described above, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the clear switch by the store clerk or the like in the game hall in the setting change process. Each time, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 is sequentially updated (for example, updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 →... Each time the clear switch is operated). Further, the set value displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (E), the CPU 103 turns off the display monitor 012IW029 based on the fact that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off by the operation of the store clerk or the like of the game hall, thereby The store clerk is notified that a new set value has been stored in the backup area of the RAM 102.

  Further, when the reserved storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the reserved storage is cleared. In addition, when the big winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 8-13 (A) (timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear process is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory related to the jackpot is erased, the big prize opening remains closed. Thereafter, the CPU 103 ends the setting change process and enters a state in which a game can be performed, that is, a state in which a change display result, a jackpot type, a change pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, or the like can be executed.

  In the setting change process in the feature unit 012IW, the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 012IW029. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 in the setting change process, the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (“1” if this feature unit 012IW) or the most advantageous for the player A set value (“3” in the case of this feature 012IW) may be displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 8-13, the setting value is displayed using the first display among the four-digit displays on the display monitor 012IW029 when the setting value is confirmed or changed. For example, the setting value may be displayed using the second and subsequent displays of the display monitor 012IW029. Further, for example, the setting value may be displayed by performing a dedicated 4-digit display on the display monitor 012IW029. In this case, for example, if the setting value is “1”, the display monitor 012IW029 displays “−S−1” in four digits, or if the setting value is “2”, “−S-2” is displayed on the display monitor 012IW029. The display monitor 012IW029 may display “−S-3” as a 4-digit display if the set value is “3”. Further, for example, the setting value may be displayed on all four digits of the display monitor 012IW029. For example, if the set value is “1”, the display monitor 012IW029 displays “1111” in four digits, and if the set value is “2”, the display monitor 012IW029 displays “2222” in four digits. May be.

(Special design normal processing)
Next, the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the feature unit 012IW will be described. FIGS. 8-14 and 8-15 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the combined reserved memory number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) (step 012 IWS 171). For example, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number is confirmed.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the second pending storage number is 0 (step 012 IWS 172). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating “second” (step 012 IWS 173). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step 012 IWS 174).

  By executing the processing of steps 012IWS172 to S174, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the variation display of the first special symbol in the feature unit 012IW. However, the display of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol are not limited to such a mode, for example, according to the start winning order in which the game balls have won the first start winning port and the second starting winning port. May be configured to execute.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 012IWS175). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 012 IWS 176). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and stores each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Shift content. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 sets the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3 and 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 103 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step 012IWS177). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the second effect control board 012IW12b (step 012IWS178). As already described, in the feature unit 112, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed when the power is turned on by executing the process of step 012IWS047. The set value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the process of 012IWS178.

  In this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted in step 012IWS047 and the case where the set value command is transmitted in step 012IWS178 is shown. You may comprise so that a command may be transmitted. For example, in step 012IWS047, a command (for example, commands 9E01 (H) to 9E03 (H) corresponding to the setting values “1” to “3”) is transmitted while the setting value is set in step 012IWS178. It may be configured to transmit identifiable variation pattern commands and prepare as many variation pattern commands as the number of set values (for example, for the set value “1”, commands 1C00 (H) ˜ are prepared as variation pattern commands. The command 2C00 (H) ˜ may be prepared as the variation pattern command for the set value “2”, and the command 3C00 (H) ˜ may be prepared as the variation pattern command for the set value “3”.

  Further, when configured as described above, even if the same variation pattern is used, if a variation pattern command different for each set value is transmitted, the total number of variation patterns × the number of set values (3 in this example) ) Fluctuation pattern commands are required, which may increase the data capacity. Therefore, for example, the configuration may be such that the set value command is transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and only the variation pattern command corresponding to the specific variation pattern is provided with the variation pattern commands corresponding to the number of set values. Good. In this case, for example, the setting value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation having the highest output frequency is used, and the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation are equivalent to the number of setting values. May be provided.

  Further, in this example, the case where the same set value command is transmitted for the set value command transmitted at power-on (see step 012IWS047) and the set value command transmitted at the start of fluctuation (see step 012IWS178) is shown. It is not limited to this aspect. For example, a set value command for power-on and a set value command for start of variation may be configured as separate commands, and different set value commands may be transmitted when the power is turned on and when change starts. Good.

  Also, in this example, a case is shown in which a set value command is transmitted separately from the variation pattern command at the start of variation, but it is configured to transmit an effect control command that uses both the variation pattern command and the set value command. Also good. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted when the setting value is “1”, and when the variation value command is “2”. The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and when the set value is “3”, the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 100 side is configured to be able to output the same variation pattern command (for example, variation pattern command A) regardless of the set value, and either the first effect control CPU 012IW 120a or the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b side. Depending on whether the set value is, it may be configured such that which variation pattern is selected or the selection ratio thereof is different. For example, if the setting value is 1, the variation pattern A-1 is selected or the variation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the variation pattern A-2 is selected or the variation pattern A-2 is high. The ratio may be selected, or if the setting value is 3, the variation pattern A-3 may be selected or the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high rate. In this case, for example, the variation patterns A-1 to A-3 have the same variation time, but may be configured so that the presence / absence or number of pseudo-continuations, presence / absence and type of reach are different. Also, in this case, for example, when the set value command cannot be received normally, the variation pattern A-1 is selected uniformly, or when the set value command cannot be received normally, the dedicated selection ratio The change pattern may be selected with the.

  Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of the change has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of the change.

  Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the second effect control board 012IW12b according to the current gaming state (step 012IWS179). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a probability change state background designation command when in the probability variation state, and performs control to transmit the time variation background designation command in the time reduction state, and is in the normal state. In this case, control to send a normal state background designation command is performed.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The big hit determination module compares a predetermined big hit determination value or small hit determination value (see FIG. 8-5) with the random value MR1, and determines that a big hit or a small hit is determined if they match. A program to be executed. That is, it is a program that executes processing for determining big hits and determining small hits.

  If the value of the random number MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in Step 012 IWS 180), the CPU 103 performs a small hit determination process (Step 012 IWS 181). If it is determined to be a small hit (Y in step 012IWS181), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step 012IWS182), and the process proceeds to step 012IWS186.

  If the value of the random number MR1 does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in Step 012IWS181), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to Step 012IWS186 as it is.

  When the value of the random number MR1 matches any one of the big hit determination values (Y of step 012IWS180), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step 012IWS183). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 8-6) to select a type corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A ”,“ Big hit type B ”or“ big hit type C ”) is determined as the big hit type (step 012 IWS 184).

  Further, the CPU 103 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS185). For example, when the big hit type is “big hit type A”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “big hit type B”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type When the big hit type is “big hit type C”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines a stop symbol of the special symbol (step 012 IWS 186). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” as a special symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. For example, when the big hit flag is set, “7” as the big hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol. In addition, you may determine to the stop symbol of a different special symbol according to jackpot classification. For example, when the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 012IWS187).

(Production control main processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in the feature part 012IW will be described. FIG. 8-16 is a flowchart illustrating the presentation control main process in the feature part 012IW. In the feature unit 012IW, the processes in steps 012IWS201 to S202 are the same as the processes in steps S71 to S72 shown in FIG. When the initial operation control process of step 012 IWS 202 is executed, the second effect control CPU 012 IW 120 b inputs date and time information from the real-time clock 012 IW 126, and stores the log information in the log area of the RAM 012 IW 122 b using the input date and time information as the power-on date and time (step 012 IWS 203).

  Next, the processing of steps 012 IWS204 to S208 is the same as the processing of steps S73 to S77 shown in FIG. When the effect random number update process of step 012IWS208 is executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the effect mode change process of changing the effect mode (step 012IWS209).

  In this feature part 012IW, it is possible to control the effect mode A to effect mode C, and depending on which effect mode is controlled, for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 is different. The types of characters appearing in the notice and reach effects are different. In the effect mode change process of step 012 IWS 209, the second effect control CPU 012 IW 120 b performs control to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, the presentation mode may be changed based on the date and time when a predetermined date or time is reached based on the date / time information from the real-time clock 012IW126. Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number may be executed, and the presentation mode may be changed based on the decision to change the presentation mode.

  In step 012 IWS 209, when the second effect control CPU 012 IW 120 b changes the effect mode, for example, a flag corresponding to the changed effect mode may be set, and the flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change may be reset. . For example, when the mode is changed to the production mode A, the production mode A flag may be set, and the production mode B flag or the production mode C flag before the change may be reset. For example, when the mode is changed to the production mode B, the production mode B flag may be set and the production mode A flag or the production mode C flag before the change may be reset. For example, when the mode is changed to the production mode C, the production mode C flag may be set and the production mode A flag or the production mode B flag before the change may be reset.

  The method of changing the production mode may be changed in a predetermined order, such as production mode A → production mode B → production mode C → production mode A →. You may make it change randomly from mode AC.

  Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes an error notification process for performing various error notifications (step 012IWS210). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b controls to the maintenance mode during the setting confirmation, and executes the maintenance mode process for displaying the maintenance history screen and the setting change / confirmation history screen (step 012IWS211). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes a setting change time recording process for recording the date and time when the setting value was changed in the setting change process (step 012IWS212). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes a current time setting process for setting the current time during the maintenance mode (step 012IWS213). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes a power interruption date recording process for recording the power interruption date and time when the power interruption occurs (step 012IWS214). Then, the process returns to step 012 IWS 204.

(Command analysis processing)
8-17 and FIG. 8-18 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis processing (step 012 IWS 206). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b checks the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 012IWS301). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 012IWS302). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step 012 IWS 303). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 012IWS304), second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in RAM 012IW122b. (Step 012 IWS 305). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets a set value command reception flag indicating that the set value command has been normally received at least once after the power to the gaming machine is turned on (step 012 IWS 306). In the feature unit 012IW, the setting value and the setting value command reception flag stored in the setting value storage area are reset in the initialization process (step 012IWS201) when power supply to the gaming machine is started. And

  In addition, in the feature unit 012IW, the setting value command is transmitted when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the setting changing process is performed. However, the setting value command is normal due to a command missing or garbled data. If it cannot be received at the same time, the process of step 012 IWS 305 is not executed, and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, in this feature 012IW, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the set value command is transmitted for each variable display. Therefore, the process of step 012 IWS 305 is performed based on the received set value command. It is executed, and the set value can be stored in the set value storage area.

  Even if the set value command is received, the set value included in the set value command may be an abnormal value. Therefore, when the set value command is read on the second effect control CPU 012 IW 120 b side, the set value command is read. You may comprise so that it may determine whether the setting value contained in a command is a normal value. For example, in this example, the setting value is configured to be set to any value from “1” to “3”, but “5” or “10” is not set and includes a value that does not have a flaw. In such a case, the setting value included in the setting value command may be determined to be abnormal. Also, for example, the setting value indicated by the received setting value command is stored on the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b side, and then when the new setting value command is received, the newly received setting value is received. If the setting value indicated by the command does not match the setting value stored last time, it may be determined that an inconsistency has occurred and it is determined that there is an abnormality. Even when it is determined that the setting value included in the setting value command is an abnormal value, it is determined that the setting value command has not been received normally, and the rendering is limited according to the processing method indicated by the feature unit 012IW. You may comprise.

(Initial outcome setting)
In the feature unit 012IW, when either the initialization designation command or the recovery command is received from the main board 11 in the command analysis processing on the second effect control board 012IW12b side, the image display device 5 Control is performed to display the outcome (specifically, a combination of decorative symbols that is displayed on the image display device 5 until the first variable display is started) (hereinafter also referred to as initial appearance effect). ).

  If the received effect control command is an initialization designation command or a command at the time of restoration (step 012IWS307), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS308). . If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting change process is executed and the set value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b stores the set value command reception flag in the RAM 012IW 122b. Based on the stored setting value, using the initial appearance determination table, even initial appearances (for example, “246”, “224”, etc.) that are combinations of even decorative patterns, and odd decorative patterns are displayed. Either an odd initial appearance (for example, “135” or “113”) that is a combination and a special initial appearance that is a combination of decorative symbols including special symbols (for example, star symbols) are determined (step) 012 IWS309). Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS 314.

  FIGS. 8-19 is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an initial appearance determination table. In step 012 IWS 309, a lottery process based on random numbers is performed according to the allocation of determination values according to the setting values stored in the setting value storage area, using the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. Determine the outcome. In the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. 8-19 (A), the ratio determined for the odd initial appearance is higher in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. Therefore, in the image display device 5 before the game starts, if the odd initial outcome is displayed, the setting is changed, and the set value is advantageous compared to the case where the even initial outcome is displayed. It is suggested that it is set to. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (A), the special initial appearance may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, if the special initial outcome is displayed on the image display device 5 before the game starts, it is determined that the setting change has been made and that the setting value is “3”. With such a configuration, interest can be given to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game, and a motivation for playing the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game shop can be given, which can enhance the interest.

  If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed, but the setting value command has not been received normally due to a reason such as missing a command or garbled data), the second The effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 012IWS310). Whether or not the production mode A is in effect can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines that the setting is “1” and uses the initial output determination table shown in FIG. Step 012 IWS 311). Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS 314.

  When the processing of steps 012IWS310 to S311 is executed, the feature unit 012IW cannot receive the set value command normally and the set value is the most unfavorable setting in the production mode A. The initial outcome is determined as being “1”. As shown in FIG. 8-19 (A), with respect to the set value “1”, the ratio determined to be an odd initial outcome is the lowest, and it is not determined to be a special initial outcome. Such a configuration reduces the situation where an odd initial appearance or special initial outcome is displayed and a player is discouraged even though an unfavorable set value is set, and the game is less interesting. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of

  If it is not the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 012IWS312). Whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set, for example. In the case of the effect mode C, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines the initial appearance using the initial appearance determination table for the effect mode C (step 012IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS 314.

  FIG. 8-19 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the initial appearance determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 8-19 (B), in the initial appearance determination table for the effect mode C, the odd number initial appearance is determined as compared with the setting value “3” that is most advantageous to the player. The percentage is low, and there is no case that it is determined as a special initial appearance.

  By executing the processing of steps 012 IWS 312 to S 313, in this feature unit 012 IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the production mode C, an unfavorable set value is set. In spite of this, the odd initial appearance and special initial outcome are displayed to reduce the situation where the player is discouraged and discouraged, and the fall of interest in the game can be prevented.

  Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to display the initial outcome determined in steps 012IWS309, S311, and S313 in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS314).

  In this feature 012IW, it is described that control is performed on the image display device 5, control for lighting the game effect lamp 9, and control for outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. The second effect control CPU 012IW120b does not directly control the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9, and the speakers 8L, 8R. More specifically, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is the first effect control CPU 012IW120a. Transmits a command for controlling the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9, and the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, on the first effect control CPU 012 IW 120 a side, various effects and notifications are performed by controlling the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9, and the speakers 8 L and 8 R based on commands from the second effect control CPU 012 IW 120 b. The same applies to other similar description places in the feature part 012IW.

  On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines the initial output as the even initial output and displays the image. In the device 5, the control for displaying the even initial number is performed (step 012IWS315).

  When the processing of step 012 IWS 315 is executed, the feature unit 012 IW uniformly displays the even initial output when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode B is set. This can reduce the situation of disappointing the player by dismissing the odd initial appearance or special initial appearance even though an unfavorable set value is set, and prevent the interest in the game from being lowered. I have to.

  Even when the set value command is not normally received in the rendering mode B, the odd initial appearance symbols may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, by using a table in which the odd-numbered initial appearance symbol determination ratio is set lower overall than the setting value “1” of the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. You may comprise so that an eye symbol may be determined.

  In this example, the case where the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode B is shown is a case where the even initial outcome is uniformly displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. . For example, when the set value command has not been received normally and in the production mode B, the set value command such as a combination of symbols “???” cannot be normally received as the initial appearance. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial outcome. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest any setting value in any form may be displayed as the initial appearance.

  Further, the processing when the set value command cannot be received normally (or when the set value cannot be stored normally) is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, when it is determined to be N in step 012 IWS 308, the setting value “1” may be stored as a default in the setting value storage area to determine the initial outcome. Further, for example, a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value “4”) indicating that the setting value command has not been received normally can be stored in the setting value storage area to determine the initial output. Also good.

  If the received effect control command is a set value abnormality error command (step 012IWS316), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes a set value abnormality error notification (step 012IWS317). For example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b displays a character display such as “There is a setting value error” on the image display device 5, or a voice or error sound indicating a setting value error from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output, and the game effect lamp 9 and the LED are caused to emit light with a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the setting value abnormality error notification is performed, the loudspeaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound of the maximum volume or the error sound, or the game effect lamp 9 or the LED emits light with the maximum luminance (for example, the full color LED In this case, it is desirable to emit light in white).

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (effect control command for designating a variation pattern) (step 012IWS320), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b converts the received variation pattern command into the variation pattern formed in the RAM012IW122b. Store in the command storage area (step 012 IWS 321). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 012 IWS 322).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (an effect control command for designating whether or not to make a big hit or whether to make a big hit, a big hit type or a small hit type) (step 012 IWS 323), the second production The control CPU 012IW 120b stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 012IW 122b (step 012IWS 324).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (an effect control command for designating to display the decorative symbol stop symbol) (step 012IWS325), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the confirmation command reception flag. (Step 012 IWS 326).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (effect control command for designating the start of a jackpot game) (step 012 IWS 327), the second effect control CPU 012 IW 120 b sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 012 IWS 328). ).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (effect control command for designating the end of the jackpot game) (step 012IWS329), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 012IWS330). ).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b stores the received effect control command or sets a flag according to the received effect control command (step 012IWS331). Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS301.

  The feature unit 012IW is configured not to display the odd initial number when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on, but may be configured to display the odd initial number. Good. Also in this case, the ratio determined for the odd initial appearance may be different according to the set value (that is, the set value may be suggested).

  Further, for example, instead of or in addition to the odd initial appearance or even initial output, an initial output that denies the possibility of a specific setting value (for example, the possibility of a setting value of 1 is denied and set) It may be determined that the value 2 or the setting value 3 is determined), an initial appearance that the specific setting value is determined, and the like may be displayed according to the setting value. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, the possibility of being the setting value 1 is denied when the specific initial appearance is displayed by preventing the setting of the specific initial appearance, and the setting value 2 or It is determined that the setting value is 3. Also, for example, only when the setting value is 3, by determining the specific initial appearance, when the specific initial appearance is displayed, it is determined that the setting value is 3. . In addition, when determining the initial appearance, it may be determined as one of these initial outcomes by lottery. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

(Setting suggestion production)
The feature unit 012IW is configured to be able to change a set value, and as a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value, the pre-game suggestion effect executed before the game, the initial appearance effect described above, , A design suggestion effect during a game that is executed during a decorative pattern change display), a setting suggestion based on the determination tendency of the variation pattern described above, and a jackpot suggestive effect that is executed during a big hit (for example, during a big hit game) Has been. In this feature part 012IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect can be executed by a plurality of types of effect modes having different suggestion reliability. You may make it the reliability of suggestion differ for every. For example, the suggestion level before the game> the suggestion effect during the jackpot> the suggestion effect during the game or the suggestion effect before the game> the suggestion effect during the game> the suggestion effect during the jackpot> Suggestion during game> Direction suggestion during jackpot> Pre-game suggestion effect, or suggestion during jackpot suggestion> Indication suggestion during game> Indication before game suggestion The reliability of the suggestion may be increased. Moreover, you may comprise so that the execution ratio of each setting suggestion effect can be set. For example, the administrator of the gaming machine does not execute a part of the setting suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect or the initial appearance effect that suggests that the setting change has been performed) or all, or the execution ratio The setting may be changed so as to be lowered (or raised). For example, a setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and setting related to the setting suggestion effect by operating an operation means such as a push button 31B or an operation means such as a switch provided inside the gaming machine (only an administrator can operate). May be changed.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 8-20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 012IWS501).

  When the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to end the customer waiting demonstration effect (step 012IWS502, step 012IWS503).

  Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the variation pattern command reception flag (step 012IWS504), updates the value of the effect process flag to “1” (step 012IWS505), and ends the variable display start waiting process.

  When the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is not executing the customer waiting demonstration effect (N in step 012IWS506), and the time measurement result by the time measuring means matches the predetermined condition. (Step 012 IWS 507). In step 012 IWS 507, for example, when a timer (for example, set for 30 seconds) set when the previous variable display (display result “losing”) ends, it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. Further, even when the timer is not set (that is, after the power is turned on, the change display has not been executed once and before the game is started), it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. That is, when a predetermined period elapses without executing variable display (and when the game is not controlled to the big hit gaming state) or before the game is started, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the customer waiting demonstration effect is performed by the process described later. Will be executed.

  If the time measured by the time measuring means matches the predetermined condition, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after power-on is 0 (step 012IWS508). That is, in step 012 IWS 508, it is confirmed whether or not a game has yet started. Whether or not the number of fluctuations after power-on is 0 is specifically a fluctuation-number counter for counting the number of times the decorative symbol fluctuation display has been performed since the game machine described later is powered on. This can be determined by checking whether the value of the step 012 IWS 603 is 0 or not.

  If the number of fluctuations after power-on is 0, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS509). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the set value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 012IW 122b. Then, using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode in the case of execution are determined according to the set value (step 012 IWS510). Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS 515.

  In the feature unit 012IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decoration lamp is changed to the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the controlled waiting demonstration effect of the aspect including the pre-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode is executed, the decoration lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestion effect of the third effect aspect is controlled. When the customer waiting demonstration effect of the aspect including is executed, the decoration lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color).

  8-21 is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table. In step 012 IWS 510, using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-21 (A), lottery processing based on random numbers is performed according to determination value allocation according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area, The presence / absence and execution mode of the pre-game suggestion effect are determined. In the pre-game suggestion effect determination table in FIG. 8-21 (A), determination values are assigned in order of the setting value “1” <“2” <“3” such that the pre-game suggestion effect execution ratio increases. It has been. In addition, the determination value is assigned so that the ratio determined in the second effect mode increases in the order of the setting value “1” <“2” <“3”. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggesting effect is executed, and that it is set to an advantageous set value by being executed in the second effect mode rather than the first effect mode. Become. In addition, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting has been changed when the power is turned on. Moreover, as shown to FIGS. 8-21 (A), it may be determined as the 3rd production aspect only when it is setting value "3". Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, it is determined that the setting change has been performed and that the setting value is “3”.

  If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed, but the setting value command has not been received normally due to a reason such as missing a command or garbled data), the second The effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 012IWS511). Whether or not the production mode A is in effect can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. In the case of the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the pre-game suggested effect using the pre-game suggested effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-21 (A), assuming that the setting value is “1”. The presence / absence and the production mode are determined (step 012IWS512). Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS 515.

  When the processing of steps 012 IWS 511 to S 512 is executed, the feature unit 012 IW cannot receive the set value command normally and is in the production mode A, the set value that is the most unfavorable setting. Whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIG. 8-21 (A), for the set value “1”, the ratio determined as the second effect mode is the lowest, and it is not determined as the third effect mode. Such a configuration reduces the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode or the third effect mode and the player is discouraged even though an unfavorable set value is set. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in games.

  If it is not the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 012IWS513). Whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set, for example. In the case of the effect mode C, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C to determine whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 012IWS514). Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS 515.

  FIG. 8-21 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 8-21 (B), in the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, it is determined that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed as compared with the case of the setting values “2” and “3”. The ratio itself determined is low, the ratio determined as the first effect mode and the second effect mode is low, and the third effect mode is not determined.

  By executing the processing of steps 012 IWS 513 to S 514, in this feature unit 012 IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode C, an unfavorable set value is set. In spite of being present, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode, thereby reducing the situation where the player is disappointed and discouraged, thereby preventing the lowering of interest in the game.

  Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect in a form including the pre-game suggestion effect determined to be executed in steps 012IWS510, S512, and S514 (step 012IWS515). Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS 517.

  On the other hand, if it is not the effect mode C (that is, if the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b proceeds directly to step 012IWS516. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect is limited so as not to be executed.

  By executing the process of step 012 IWS 513, the feature unit 012 IW does not execute the pre-game suggesting effect when the setting value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode B, The situation where the pre-game suggestion effect is executed despite the unfavorable set value being set and the player is discouraged is reduced, and the interest in the game can be prevented from being lowered.

  Even if the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the execution ratio of the pre-game suggestion effect is set to be lower than the setting value “1” of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. You may comprise so that the presence or absence and kind of suggestion production may be determined.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the example shown to FIGS. 8-21 (A), Only the specific production | generation aspect (for example, 2nd production | generation aspect) of several production | generation aspects seems to be performed according to a setting value. It may be.

  Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of setting value 1, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by setting the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) to be determined, The possibility of the value 1 is denied, and the setting value 2 or the setting value 3 is determined. In addition, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, the specific set value may be determined. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3, It is determined that the setting value is 3.

  In this feature part 012IW, the pre-game suggestion effect can be executed at different ratios according to the set value. This is because the pre-game suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode and 3 execution modes are different), the execution ratios of the first production mode, the second production mode, and the third production mode are different according to the set value, and only the specific production mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

  The feature unit 012IW is configured not to execute the pre-game suggesting effect when the setting change is not performed when the power is turned on and the setting value command has not yet been received. Not limited to this, even when the setting is not changed, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executable. In this case, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode for execution may be determined at different rates depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

  For example, FIG. 8-21 (C) is a pre-game suggestion effect determination table used when a command at the time of recovery is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-21 (A) and the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-21 (C), when the command at the time of recovery is received, that is, the setting change is made. When not being performed, the proportion of execution of the pre-game suggestion effect is low and the difference in execution proportion between the set values is also smaller than when the setting is changed. By doing in this way, the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestion effect can be made different when the setting change is performed and when it is not performed.

  If the number of fluctuations after power-on is not 0, CPU 120 performs control to execute a customer waiting demonstration effect in a form including execution history information of setting suggestion effects (excluding pre-game suggestion effects) (step 012 IWS 516).

  When the processing of step 012 IWS 516 is executed, for example, in the image display device 5, an execution history indicating the number of executions of setting suggestion effects (game suggestion effects or big hit suggestion effects), execution contents (effect mode at the time of execution), and the like. A demonstration of waiting for a customer in a manner in which information is displayed is executed. When the process of step 012 IWS 516 is executed, a customer waiting de effect is executed, and when a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect, In the image display device 5, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may be displayed. In addition, on the side of the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b, the number of executions and the contents of execution of the setting suggestion effects (such as the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, the game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect). It is also possible to store information indicating (the effect mode at the time of execution) and execute the effect in which the set value is estimated from the information and notified. In addition, this production | presentation alert | reports the setting expectation degree (or setting value estimated) calculated based on the predetermined reference | standard from the execution condition of the setting suggestion effect | action, and does not alert | report an actual setting value. .

  In the feature unit 012IW, the pre-game suggesting effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 012IWS508 to 012IWS515. Also, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect is shown during the customer waiting demonstration effect by the process of step 012 IWS 516, but information related to the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, interest can be given to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game, a motivation for playing the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game shop can be given, and the interest can be enhanced. . It should be noted that the pre-game suggesting effect is executed only in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9 am to 11 am) using, for example, the real time clock 012 IW 126 or the like, without being limited to the example of the feature unit 012 IW. May be. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may not include information related to the suggestion effect during game during the special period.

  In addition to the configuration of the feature unit 012IW, the number of executions and execution contents of the setting suggestion effect are accumulated as execution history information, and the image display device 5 at the end of the game or the like includes two-dimensional information including execution history information as described later. You may comprise so that a code | cord | chord etc. may be displayed. Further, when a player uses a portable terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function to photograph a two-dimensional code displayed on the gaming machine and transmits it to a web server on the Internet, the web server is based on the received information. The game history of the player may be managed, and a process of giving a predetermined privilege according to the game history may be performed. Further, the execution history information may be acquired by a player accessing the Web server using a mobile terminal (or analyzing a two-dimensional code) and displayed on a display device included in the mobile terminal. Moreover, the setting suggestion image which suggests a setting value may be displayed on the display apparatus with which a portable terminal is equipped, when a player reads the two-dimensional code containing execution history information using a portable terminal. For example, a setting value estimated based on a predetermined criterion is calculated from execution history information, and a setting suggestion image that suggests the calculated setting value (which is only an estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. May be.

  Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it has been detected that the game end operation has been performed by the player (step 012IWS517). For example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b confirms whether or not the selection of the game end option has been selected and the determination operation has been performed based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B. . If it is detected that the game end operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b extracts the log information from the log area of the RAM012IW122b, and extracts the extracted log information (for example, log information of a probable change non-establishment date and time described later). Is generated (step 012IWS518). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to display the generated two-dimensional code on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS519), and ends the variable display start waiting process.

  Note that in this feature part 012IW, it is described that the operation has been performed, but the second effect control CPU 012IW120b does not directly input a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B. More specifically, first, a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B is input on the first effect control CPU 012IW120a side, and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b passes through the first effect control CPU 012IW120a. A command indicating that the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B has been operated is input. The same applies to other similar description places in the feature part 012IW.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-22 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first reads out a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 012IWS601). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b displays the decorative pattern display result according to the variation pattern command read out in step 012IWS601 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Stop symbol) is determined (step 012 IWS 602). That is, when the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the process of step 012IWS602, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. Display result determining means for determining the stop symbol) is realized. The second effect control CPU 012IW 120b stores data indicating the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 012 IWS 602, second effect control CPU 012 IW 120 b determines whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. Also good.

  In step 012 IWS 602, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a probable big hit, the second effect control CPU 012 IW 120 b determines a combination of decorative symbols in which the three symbols are arranged in the same odd number as the stopped symbols. . Also, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a normal big hit (non-probable big hit), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b uses a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are arranged in the same even number as the stop symbols. To decide.

  When the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b selects a combination of small hit symbols according to the small hit type designated by the display result designation command. decide. In this example, the combination of “135” is determined as the small hit symbol when the small hit type is A, and the combination of “357” is determined as the small hit symbol when the small hit type is B. In the case of the type C, a combination of “579” is determined as the small hit symbol.

  If the received display result designation command indicates a loss, a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined.

  When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines the chance symbol pattern (for example, “223” or “445” as a temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream in step 012IWS602. In this way, the jackpot symbol that is not reachable and the symbol combination that is shifted by one symbol) are also determined.

  The second effect control CPU 012IW120b extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and stops the decorative symbol using a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols is associated with a numerical value. Determine the design. That is, a stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

  Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b adds 1 to the value of the variation counter for counting the number of executions of the decorative symbol variation display after the game machine is powered on (step 012 IWS 603). In this feature 012IW, the value of the variation counter is reset in the initialization process (step 012IWS201) when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and the value of the variation counter when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. It starts from a state where the value is zero.

  Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes a game suggestion effect determination process for determining the presence / absence and effect mode of the game suggestion effect (step 012IWS604).

  Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b selects a process table corresponding to the suggestion effect during game if the change pattern and execution of the suggestion effect during game are determined (step 012IWS605). Then, second effect control CPU 012 IW 120 b starts a process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 012 IWS 606).

  The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b controls effect devices (effect components) such as the image display device 5 in accordance with the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbols. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The second effect control CPU 012IW 120b refers to the process table, and performs control to display the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. The process table is stored in the ROM 012IW121b in the second effect control board 012IW12b. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  If execution of the game suggestion effect is determined in the game suggestion effect determination process in step 012 IWS 604, a process table including the game suggestion effect is selected in step 012 IWS 605, and step 012 IWS 607 is selected in accordance with the selected process table. Further, by executing the variable display effect process (step S172), the game suggestion effect is executed during the decorative symbol variation display.

  Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs the effect device (the image display device 5 as the effect component, the effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). The various lamps and the speakers 8L and 8R as the production parts are controlled (step 012IWS607).

  In this feature part 012IW, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis, but the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is controlled. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern command.

  Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step 012IWS608). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b updates the value of the effect process flag to “2” (step 012IWS609), and ends the variable display start setting process.

(Indication suggestion processing during game)
FIG. 8-23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the game suggestion effect determination process (step 012 IWS 604). The suggestion effect determination process during the game is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the in-game suggestion effect determination process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b selects the first in-game suggestion effect determination table (step 012IWS702) during the special period when the special period is in effect (Y in step 012IWS701). If not (N in step 012IWS701), the second game suggestion effect determination table is selected (step 012IWS703). For example, when a setting change end command or a set value command is received, a special period flag is set, and when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), the special period flag is reset. For example, by checking the state of the special period flag, it can be confirmed in step 012 IWS 701 whether or not it is during the special period.

  Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS704). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the set value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 012IW 122b. Then, using the selected game suggestion effect determination table, the presence / absence of execution of the game suggestion effect and the effect mode in the case of execution are determined (step 012 IWS 705).

  FIG. 8-24 (A) is an explanatory view showing a first game suggestion effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 8-24 (B) is a second game suggestion effect used in the non-special period. It is explanatory drawing which shows a determination table.

  In the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-24 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestion effect is executed in the order of the set value “1” <“2” <“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the ratio of being processed becomes high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that an advantageous setting value is set by executing the suggestion effect during the game.

  In addition, with respect to the second effect mode (appearance of mini characters A and B), the ratio of execution in the order of the set value “1” <“2” <“3” is high, and the first effect mode (appearance of mini character A) The determination values are assigned so that the difference in the execution ratio between the set values becomes larger. In other words, the second rendering mode has a high degree of reliability with respect to being set to a set value that is more advantageous than the first rendering mode.

  Further, in the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-24 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestion effect in the second effect mode with high reliability is executed only during the special period. It is configured as follows. With such a configuration, a motivation for playing a game during a special period can be provided, and the interest can be enhanced.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-24 (A) and (B), the third effect mode (appearance of character C) may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, the setting value “3” is determined by executing the game suggestion effect in the third effect mode.

  If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed, but the setting value command has not been received normally due to a reason such as missing a command or garbled data), the second The effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 012IWS706). Whether or not the production mode A is in effect can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. In the case of the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines the presence / absence of execution of the game suggestion effect and the effect mode using the selected game suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the setting value is “1”. (Step 012 IWS 707).

  By executing the processing of steps 012 IWS 706 to S 707, the feature unit 012 IW cannot receive the set value command normally and is in the rendering mode A, the set value that is the most unfavorable setting. The presence / absence of execution of the game suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined as “1”. As shown in FIGS. 8-24 (A) and (B), for the set value “1”, the ratio of determining to execute the game suggesting effect is low and the ratio of determining the second effect mode. Is the lowest and is not determined to be the third effect mode. Such a configuration reduces the situation in which the suggestive effect during the game is executed by the second effect mode or the third effect mode and the player is discouraged even though an unfavorable set value is set. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in games.

  If it is not the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 012IWS708). Whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set, for example. In the case of the effect mode C, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b uses the effect suggestion determination table for effect mode C to determine whether or not to execute the effect suggestion during game and the effect mode (step 012IWS709).

  FIG. 8-24 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 8-24 (C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the proportion determined to execute the in-game suggestion effect is lower than in the case of the set value “3”. There is also no case of being determined as the third effect mode.

  By executing the processing of steps 012 IWS 708 to S 709, in this feature unit 012 IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode C, an unfavorable set value is set. In spite of being present, the second effect mode and the third effect mode are executed to reduce the situation in which the suggestion effect during the game is executed and the player is discouraged, and the interest in the game can be prevented from being lowered.

  On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b ends the process as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is restricted so as not to execute the suggestion effect during the game.

  By executing the process of step 012 IWS 708, the feature unit 012 IW does not execute the suggestion effect during the game when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode B, Although a disadvantageous set value is set, a situation in which a suggestion effect during a game is executed and the player is disappointed and disappointed is reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

  Even if the set value command has not been normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during game may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the suggestion effect during game is set to be lower than the set value “1” of the suggestion effect determination table during game shown in FIGS. 8-24 (A) and (B) is used. Thus, the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the game may be determined.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the example shown to FIGS. 8-24 (A) and (B), Only the specific production | generation aspect (for example, 2nd production | generation aspect) of several production | generation aspects is performed according to a setting value. You may make it a ratio differ.

  Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of setting value 1, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by setting the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) to be determined, The possibility of the value 1 is denied, and the setting value 2 or the setting value 3 is determined. In addition, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, the specific set value may be determined. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3, It is determined that the setting value is 3.

  In this feature part 012IW, a game suggestion effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value. This is because the game suggestion effect (the first effect mode, the second effect mode and the second effect mode) 3 execution modes are different), the execution ratios of the first production mode, the second production mode, and the third production mode are different according to the set value, and only the specific production mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

  In addition, in this feature part 012IW, it is comprised so that the suggestion effect in the game of a common aspect (for example, 1st effect aspect) can be performed by a special period and a non-special period, but it is not restricted to such a structure. It may be possible to execute a different suggestion effect during the game. For example, the size and color of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

  In addition, the feature unit 012IW is configured such that the presence / absence of execution of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode when executed are different depending on whether the special period or the non-special period is set and the set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the variation time specified by the variation pattern, the presence or absence of reach production, the type of reach production, the presence or absence of pseudo-continuous production, the type of pseudo-continuous production, the display result is a big hit Depending on whether or not the game suggestion effect is executed, whether or not it is executed may be different.

  For example, the suggestion effect during game may be executable only when the variation pattern includes a reach effect (that is, the variation time is longer than that of the non-reach variation pattern). Further, for example, in the variation pattern including the super reach B and the variation pattern including the super reach A having a higher degree of expectation than the super reach B, the latter is likely to have a higher ratio of execution of the suggestion effect during the game. Alternatively, the degree of reliability when the in-game suggestion effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the in-game suggestion effect is executed increases, and the degree of reliability when the effect is executed is increased. You may make it high.

  Further, for example, in the variation pattern including the pseudo-continuous effect and the variation pattern not including the pseudo-continuous effect (or the number of pseudo-continuous times is smaller than that of the former), the former is more likely to execute the suggestion effect during the game. It may be made higher, or the reliability when the game suggestion effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the game suggestion effect is executed is increased and is executed. The reliability may be increased.

  In addition, for example, in the variation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and the variation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may have a higher ratio of executing the suggestion effect during the game. The degree of reliability when the medium suggestion effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the game suggestion effect is executed is increased, and the degree of reliability when the effect is executed may be increased. .

(Determination processing during big hit)
FIG. 8-25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit effect determination process. The big hit effect determination process is executed in the big hit release pre-processing (step S114). In the big hit effect determination process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS901). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the set value command is received normally), the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 012IW 122b. The presence / absence of execution of the big hit suggestion effect is determined and the effect mode in the case of execution is determined (step 012 IWS 902). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS907.

  In step S012IWS902, when the variation display is a specific time period (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific time period) from the game start time to a specific time (in this example, 100 times), it is shown in FIG. 8-26 (A). When the big hit suggestion effect determination table is selected, and it is not during the specific period, the second big hit suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-26 (B) is selected. Then, based on the selected big hit suggestion effect determination table and the set value, the presence / absence of execution of the big hit suggestion effect and the effect mode in the case of execution are determined. The “game start time” here refers to the time when the first fluctuation display is started after the power is turned on, but is not limited to this, for example, the first fluctuation after the end of the previous villa. It may be the time when the display is started, or may be the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect. In addition, in this feature part 012IW, the period from when the game is started to when the change display is executed a specific number of times (in this example, 100 times) is set as the specific period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from when the game is started until the variation display is executed a specific time (100 times in this example) may be set as the specific period. Further, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and the first specific period (the period from when the game is started until the fluctuation display is executed 50 times) and the second specific period (the 51st fluctuation after the game starts). It is also possible to use a big hit suggestion effect determination table in which the presence / absence of the big hit suggestion effect and the determination ratio of the effect mode are different from the display to the execution of the 100th variation display).

  In the first and second big hit suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-26 (A) and (B), the big hit indication effect is executed in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the ratio of being processed becomes high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that an advantageous setting value is set by executing the big hit suggestion effect.

  Moreover, about the 2nd production mode and the 3rd production mode, the ratio which is executed in order of setting value “1” <“2” <“3” is high, execution ratio between setting values in specific period and non-specific period The determination value is assigned so that the difference between the two becomes large. That is, in the specific period, the big hit suggestion effect having higher reliability than the non-specific period is executed. With such a configuration, a motivation for playing a game during a specific period can be given, and interest can be enhanced. In addition, not only the configuration of the feature unit 012IW but the big hit suggestion effect (or a specific effect mode thereof) may be executed only in a specific period and may not be executed in a non-specific period.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-26 (A) and (B), the fourth effect may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed in the fourth effect mode, it is determined that the setting value is “3”.

  In the feature portion 012IW, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed in the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-38 (A1), the decorative symbol that is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. After that, as shown in FIG. 8-38 (B1), a speech C image (“high setting !?”) 012IW102 is displayed.

  Further, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed in the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-38 (A1), after the decorative symbol that is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5, As shown in 8-39 (C1), a dialog D image (“high setting confirmed”) 012IW105 is displayed.

  If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed, but the setting value command has not been received normally due to a reason such as missing a command or garbled data), the second The effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 012IWS903). Whether or not the production mode A is in effect can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. In the case of the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines the presence / absence of execution of the jackpot suggestion effect and the effect mode using the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the setting value is “1”. (Step 012 IWS904). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS907.

  When the processing of steps 012 IWS 903 to S 904 is executed, the feature unit 012 IW is unable to receive the setting value command normally and is in the rendering mode A, the setting value that is the most unfavorable setting. The presence / absence of execution of the big hit suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIGS. 8-26 (A) and (B), for the set value “1”, the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is the lowest, and the fourth effect mode is determined. There is no case. With such a configuration, despite the setting of an unfavorable setting value, the second stage, the third stage, and the third stage are executed with the big hit suggesting stage and the player is disappointed. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in games.

  If it is not the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 012IWS905). Whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set, for example. In the case of the effect mode C, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not the big hit suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the big hit suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 012IWS906). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS907.

  FIG. 8-26 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot suggesting effect determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 8-26 (C), in the big hit suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio itself determined to execute the big hit suggestion effect is low, and the setting value is “2” or “3”. Compared with, the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is low, and the fourth effect mode may not be determined.

  By executing the processing of steps 012 IWS 905 to S 906, in this feature unit 012 IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode C, an unfavorable set value is set. In spite of being present, the second stage, the third stage, and the third stage can be used to reduce the situation in which the big hit suggesting stage is executed and disappointing the player and discouraging the game. I have to.

  On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b proceeds to step 012IWS907 as it is. That is, in the case of the production mode B, it is restricted so as not to perform the big hit suggestion production.

  By executing the process of step 012 IWS 905, in this feature unit 012 IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the production mode B, the big hit suggestion production is not executed. Although a disadvantageous set value is set, a situation in which a suggestion effect during a big hit is executed and the player is discouraged is reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

  Even in the case where the set value command has not been normally received in the effect mode B, it may be configured to be able to execute the big hit suggestion effect at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the big hit suggestion effect is set to be lower than the set value “1” of the big hit suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 8-26 (A) and (B) is used. The presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the big hit may be determined.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the example shown to FIGS. 8-26 (A) and (B), Only the specific production | generation aspect (for example, 3rd production | generation aspect) of several production | generation aspects is performed according to a setting value. You may make it a ratio differ.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), when the big hit is made in a specific period, the suggestion effect is always executed during the big hit, but it may not be executed at a low rate. May be. In this case, you may make it vary the ratio which is not performed according to a setting value. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 8-26 (B), the ratio that the big hit suggestion effect is not executed is the same regardless of the set value, but the ratio that is not executed according to the set value is different. You may make it let.

  In addition, in the feature unit 012IW, when the big hit is made in a specific period, the big hit suggestion effect is executed as the setting suggestion effect. In addition to or instead of such a configuration, A setting suggestion effect (for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a dialogue image indicating a set value is displayed) may be executed based on the predetermined condition being satisfied in a specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the number of executions of the reach effect or the pseudo-continuous effect reaches a predetermined number, or when a specific super reach effect or notice effect is executed.

  In this feature part 012IW, it is possible to execute a big hit suggestion effect at a different rate depending on the set value, but this is a big hit suggestive effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, third The execution ratio of the production mode and the fourth production mode is different, the execution ratios of the first production mode, the second production mode, the third production mode, and the fourth production mode are different according to the set value, and the set value. This is a concept including that the execution ratio differs only in a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode).

  Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not to perform the accessory effect (step 012IWS907).

  Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-38 (A1), it is assumed that the movable member 012IW101 is provided above the image display device 5. In such a configuration, when the accessory effect is executed, the movable member 012IW101 is controlled to move to the front surface of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-38 (B2).

  As shown in FIGS. 8-38 (A1) and (B2), when the effect effect is executed, the movable member 012IW101 moves to the front surface of the image display device 5. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the position where the serif image is displayed. In this feature part 012IW, since the big hit suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at different timings during the fanfare period in the big hit game, the movable member 012IW101 that has actually moved to the front of the image display device 5 The dialogue image displayed by the medium suggestion effect is not obscured. However, if the movable member 012IW101 is operated by the effect effect during the fanfare period, the player's attention may be directed to the movable member 012IW101, and the dialogue image displayed by the big hit suggestion effect may be overlooked. Therefore, in step 012 IWS 907, by using the accessory effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-26 (D), when the big hit suggestion effect is executed, the accessory effect is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize and reducing the interest. Also, with such a configuration, even if the big hit suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at the same timing, it is possible to prevent the big hit suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize.

  When the execution of the big hit suggestion effect is determined, the execution timing of either the big hit suggestion effect or the accessory effect is changed (for example, the accessory effect is performed during the fanfare period, It is also possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from being difficult to recognize. Further, when execution of the big hit suggestion effect is determined, the operation mode of the movable member 012IW101 is changed (for example, control is performed so as not to stop at a position overlapping the speech image by the big hit suggestion effect), or the big hit The display position of the dialogue image by the medium suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the big hit suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize. In addition, when the execution of the big hit suggestion effect is determined, the execution of the accessory effect may be limited by reducing the execution ratio of the accessory effect. Moreover, you may make it restrict | limit execution of an effect production only for a specific period. Further, the present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-26 (D), and when the big hit suggestion effect is executed, the accessory effect may be executed at a low rate.

  Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines the presence or absence of the light guide plate effect (step 012IWS909) when the accessory effect is not executed (N in step 012IWS908).

  Here, on the front surface of the image display device 5, a light guide plate 012IW103 having translucency capable of transmitting light and a light emitter provided so that light can enter from an end surface of the light guide plate are provided. It is assumed that there is provided a reflecting portion that reflects light incident on the inside of the light guide plate 012IW103 from the end face of the light guide plate 012IW103 by the light emitter and emits it to the front surface of the gaming machine. Then, by causing the light emitter to emit light, it is possible to execute a light guide plate effect in which light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 012IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-38 (B3), light is emitted from the reflection portion provided on the light guide plate 012IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine, and “big hit” Appears. Further, during execution of the light guide plate effect, it is difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5.

  In step 012 IWS 909, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-26 (E), the light guide plate effect is executed at different ratios depending on the presence / absence of the big hit suggestion effect and the effect mode when executed. The Specifically, when the suggestion effect during the jackpot of the first effect mode is executed, the ratio of the light guide plate effect being high is high, and the suggestion during the jackpot of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is performed. When the effect is executed, the ratio at which the light guide plate effect is executed is reduced. That is, when the big hit suggestion effect during the big hit of the production mode that is not suggested to be an advantageous setting value is executed, the ratio that the light guide plate effect is executed is high, and the big hit suggestive effect is difficult to visually recognize. Yes. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-38 (B4), the light guide plate effect is executed when the dialogue A image (“setting is ...”) 012IW104 is displayed by the big hit suggestion effect in the first effect mode. Then, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the serif A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game entertainment from being lowered due to the suggestion effect during the big hit of the effect mode that is undesirable for the player. In addition, when the big hit suggestion effect during the big hit of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is executed, the execution timing of either the big hit suggestion effect or the light guide plate effect is changed (for example, the light guide plate). The production may be performed during the fanfare period and the suggestion effect during the big hit may be performed during the ending period).

(Ending production process)
FIG. 8-27 is a flowchart showing an ending effect process (step S177) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the ending effect process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 012IWS951). The effect period measurement timer is set based on the fact that all rounds of the jackpot game are completed in the jackpot effect processing (see step S176). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 012IWS952).

  When the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N in Step 012IWS952), the second production control CPU 012IW120b subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (Step 012IWS953), and the production device (image display) is displayed according to the contents of the process data n. Processing for controlling the device 5, game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) is executed (step 012IWS954). For example, an effect of displaying that the big hit ends or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

  Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 012IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 012IWS956). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step 012 IWS957).

  If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 012IWS952), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the big hit game to be ended this time is a big hit game based on the probable big hit (step 012IW958). Whether or not it is a probable big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is not a probable big hit (N in Step 012IW958), the process proceeds to Step 012IWS961 as it is.

  If the big hit game based on the probable big hit is to be ended (Y in step 012IWS958), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the V winning designation command is received (step 012IWS959). If the V winning designation command has been received (Y in step 012IWS959), the process proceeds to step 012IWS961 as it is.

  If the V winning designation command has not been received (N in step 012IWS959), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date / time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and logs the input date / time information in the log area of the RAM 012IW122b as the probability change not established date / time. Information is stored (step 012 IWS 960). That is, in this case, the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is controlled for the big hit game based on the probability change big hit, and the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is opened for a relatively long time (29.5 seconds in this example). Since the game ball is not won in the V winning area in the special variable winning device 012IW007b and is not controlled to the probability variation state, the log information is recorded as the probability variation failure date and time. Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS961.

  Thereafter, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b updates the value of the effect process flag to “0” (step 012IWS961), and ends the ending effect process.

  In this example, the case where the probability change failure is detected in the ending period at the end of the big hit game and the log information is recorded is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, in this example, since the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is released in the fourth round during the big hit game, at the end of the fourth round (when the second special variable winning device 012IW007b after the fourth round is closed) Alternatively, the log information may be recorded by detecting whether or not the probability change is not established during the fifth round after the fourth round (when the second special variable winning device 012IW007b of the fifth round is opened). Good.

(Error notification process)
FIGS. 8-28 to 8-31 are flowcharts showing the error notification process (step 012 IWS 210). In the error notification process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first checks whether or not a first left-handed notification flag indicating that the first left-handed notification is being executed is set (step 012IWS101). If the first left-hand notification flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether the second left-hand notification flag indicating that the second left-hand notification is being executed is set. Confirm (Step 012 IWS102).

  If the second left-handed notification flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not a big hit game is being played (step 012IWS103). Whether or not the game is a big hit game, for example, the value of the production process flag updated in the production control process is a value indicating the big hit middle production process (step S176) to the ending production process (step S177). It can be determined by checking whether or not. If it is not in the big hit game, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the high base state is in effect (step 012IWS104). Whether it is in the high base state, for example, confirms whether or not a command that can specify that it is in the high base state (for example, a probable change state background designation command, a time-short state background designation command) has been received. This can be determined.

  If it is not in the high base state (that is, if it is in the low base state), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not a gate passage designation command has been received (step 012IWS105). If the gate passage designation command is received (that is, if the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 012IW041 is detected), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b counts the number of game balls that have passed the passage gate 012IW041. 1 is added to the value of the gate passage counter for this (step 012 IWS 106), and it is confirmed whether or not the value of the gate passage counter after the addition is 5 (step 012 IWS 107).

  If the value of the gate passage counter is 5, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start displaying the left-handed notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS108). For example, the image display device 5 performs control to start displaying a character display such as “Aim for the left!”. Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the first left-handed notification flag (step 012IWS109). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (5 seconds in this example) to the first left-handed notification timer for measuring the execution period of the first left-handed notification (step 5). 012 IWS110). That is, in this case, the left-handed operation is originally performed because it is in the low base state and not in the big hit game, but the total number of game balls passed to the pass gate 012IW041 provided in the right area of the game area In this case, since the right-handed operation is performed, the first left-handed notification is made to prompt the player to perform the left-handed operation.

  If the value of the gate passage counter after the addition is not 5, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the value of the gate passage counter after the addition is 10 (step 012IWS111). If the value of the gate passage counter is 10, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control for starting display of the left-handed notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS112). For example, the image display device 5 performs control to start displaying a character display such as “Aim for the left!”. In this case, for example, a left-handed notification display having a larger size may be displayed as compared with the case where the first left-handed notification is executed. Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start all the game effect lamps 9 (step 012IWS113). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start outputting predetermined notification sounds from the speakers 8L, 8R (step 012IWS114). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a second left-handed notification in-progress flag (step 012IWS115). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (33 seconds in this example) to the second left-handed notification timer for measuring the execution period of the second left-handed notification (step 33). 012 IWS 116). That is, in this case, when the game is in the low base state and not in the big hit game, it is detected that the passing of the game ball to the pass gate 012IW041 provided in the right area of the game area is detected 10 times in total. Therefore, the second left-hand notification is made to prompt the player to perform a left-hand operation. Note that the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b resets the first left-handed notification flag and the first left-handed notification timer if set.

  In this example, the execution condition of the second left-handed notification is established based on the detection of the passing of the game ball to the pass gate 012IW041 in total 10 times, whereas the game ball to the pass gate 012IW041 is satisfied. Since the first left-handed notification execution condition is established based on the detection of the passage five times in total, the second left-handed notification execution condition is satisfied based on the two first left-handed notification execution conditions being satisfied. The execution condition is satisfied.

  Further, in this example, a case is shown in which the execution condition of the left-handed notification is established based on the detection of the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 012IW041 5 times or 10 times in total. It is not limited to this aspect. For example, when the second start winning opening is provided in the right area of the game ball, if the game ball wins at the second start winning opening is detected even once, the execution condition of the left-handed notification is established. As a thing, you may comprise so that left-handed notification may be performed.

  Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date / time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and stores the log information in the log area of the RAM012IW122b using the input date / time information as the left-handed notification date / time (step 012IWS117). Thus, in this example, there are two types of left-handed notifications, the first left-handed notification and the second left-handed notification. Log information is not recorded when recording the information and executing the first left-hand notification with low importance.

  If a gate passage designation command has not been received (N in step 012IWS105, that is, if the passage of a game ball in the passage gate 012IW041 has been detected, has the second effect control CPU 012IW120b received a prize opening prize designation command? (Step 012 IWS 118) If the winning opening winning designation command is received (that is, if a winning of a game ball to the general winning opening 10 is detected), the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b The value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0 (step 012 IWS 119) In other words, the fact that the winning opening winning designation command has been received means that a game ball wins into the general winning opening 10 provided in the left area of the gaming area. This means that the player is performing a left-handed operation. Since it is, it clears the value of the gate passage counter to zero.

  Also, when the big hit game is in progress (Y in step 012IWS103) or in the high base state (Y in step 012IWS104), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b proceeds to step 012IWS119, and the gate pass counter The value is cleared to 0 (step 012 IWS119). That is, when the big hit game or the high base state is in the case of performing a right-handed operation, the value of the gate passage counter is cleared to zero.

  When the first left-handed notification flag is set (Y of step 012IWS101), that is, when the first left-handed notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b notifies the first left-handed notification. It is confirmed whether or not the timer has timed out (step 012 IWS120). If the first left-handed notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to end the display of the left-handed notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS121). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the first left-hand notification flag (step 012IWS122).

  When the second left-handed notification flag is set (Y of step 012IWS102), that is, when the second left-handed notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b notifies the second left-handed notification. It is confirmed whether or not the timer has timed out (step 012 IWS123). If the second left-handed notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to end the display of the left-handed notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS124). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to end all the game effect lamps 9 (step 012IWS125) and performs control to end output of the predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS126). ). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the second left-handed notification flag (step 012IWS127). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b clears the value of the gate passage counter to 0 (step 012IWS128).

  In this example, it is detected that a game ball winning at the general winning opening 10 is detected, that a big hit game is being played, a high base state, and a second left-handed notification period (33 seconds). Although the case where the value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0 based on the elapse of time is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0 based on the detection of a game ball winning at the general winning opening 10, the big hit game, and the high base state. Even if the notification period (33 seconds) of the left-hand notification is passed, the value of the gate passage counter may not be cleared, and various processing modes are conceivable.

  Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the first full tank notification flag indicating that the first full tank notification is being executed is set (step 012IWS129). If the first full tank notification flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether the second full tank notification flag indicating that the second full tank notification is being executed is set. Confirm (step 012 IWS 130).

  If the second full tank notification flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not a full tank detection command is received (step 012IWS131). If the full tank detection command has been received, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b determines whether or not the full tank flag indicating that the full supply state of the hitting ball supply tray (lower plate) is being detected is set. Confirm (step 012 IWS132). If the full tank flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the full tank flag (step 012IWS133) and measures the duration of the full supply state of the hitting ball supply tray (lower plate). A full timer is set (step 012 IWS 134).

  If the full flag is set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the value of the full timer is equal to 10 seconds (step 012IWS135). If the value of the full tank timer is a value corresponding to 10 seconds (that is, if the batting supply tray (lower plate) is fully filled for 10 seconds), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b The image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying a full tank notification display (step 012 IWS 136). For example, the image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying a character display such as “The bottom plate is full!”. Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the first full-notification flag (step 012IWS137). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (5 seconds in this example) to the first full tank notification timer for measuring the execution period of the first full tank notification (step 5). 012 IWS 138).

  If the full timer value is not a value corresponding to 10 seconds, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the full timer value is a value corresponding to 30 seconds (step 012IWS139). ). If the value of the full tank timer is a value corresponding to 30 seconds (that is, if the full hit state of the hitting ball supply tray (lower plate) continues for 30 seconds), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b The image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying a full tank notification display (step 012 IWS 140). For example, the image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying a character display such as “The bottom plate is full!”. In this case, for example, it may be configured to display a full-size notification display having a larger size compared to the case where the first full-full notification is executed. Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start all the game effect lamps 9 (step 012IWS141). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start outputting predetermined notification sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS142). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the second full-notification flag (step 012IWS143). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (33 seconds in this example) to the second full tank notification timer for measuring the execution period of the second full tank notification (step 33 in this example). 012 IWS144). Note that the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b resets the first full tank notification flag and the first full tank notification timer if set.

  In this example, when the second full notification is executed, the case where all the game effect lamps 9 and the output of the predetermined notification sound are executed in the same manner as when the second left-hand notification is executed is shown. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the game effect lamp 9 may be configured to execute all the lights or a predetermined notification sound, or may be configured to light only a part of the game effect lamp 9. Good.

  Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date / time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and stores the log information in the log area of the RAM012IW122b using the input date / time information as a full tank notification date / time (step 012IWS145). In this way, in this example, there are two types of full tank notifications, the first full tank notification and the second full tank notification, but only when executing the second full tank notification having a high importance. Log information is not recorded when the first full notification with low importance is recorded.

  On the other hand, if the full tank detection command is not received (N in step 012IWS131), that is, if the full supply state of the hitting ball supply tray (lower plate) is not detected, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is not set. If the full flag is reset, the full timer is reset (step 012 IWS 146).

  When the first full tank notification flag is set (Y of step 012IWS129), that is, when the first full notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b notifies the first full tank notification. It is confirmed whether or not the timer has timed out (step 012 IWS 147). If the first full tank notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to end the display of the full tank notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS148). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the first full tank notification flag (step 012IWS149).

  When the second full tank notification flag is set (Y of step 012IWS130), that is, when the second full notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b notifies the second full tank notification. It is confirmed whether or not the timer has timed out (step 012 IWS150). If the second full tank notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to end display of the left-handed notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS151). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to end all the game effect lamps 9 (step 012IWS152) and performs control to end output of the predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS153). ). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the second full tank notification flag (step 012IWS154). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the full tank flag and resets the full timer (step 012IWS155).

(Maintenance mode processing)
FIG. 8-32 is a flowchart showing the maintenance mode process (step 012IWS211). In the maintenance mode process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first checks whether or not the maintenance mode flag indicating that the maintenance mode is being set is set (step 012IWS451). If the maintenance mode flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not a setting confirmation flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (step 012IWS452).

  If the setting confirmation flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not a setting confirmation command has been received (step 012IWS453). If the setting confirmation command has been received, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b performs control for starting display of the setting confirmation display on the image display device 5 (step 012 IWS 454). For example, the image display device 5 performs control to start displaying a character display such as “Setting is being confirmed”. Also, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a setting confirmation flag (step 012IWS455).

  If the setting confirmation flag is set (Y of step 012IWS452), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines that the push button 31B is on (specifically, a detection signal from the push sensor 35B is input). (Step 012IWS456). If push button 31B is on, second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start displaying the maintenance mode menu screen on image display device 5 (step 012IWS457). Also, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a maintenance mode flag (step 012IWS458).

  As described above, by executing the processing of steps 012IWS452 to S458, in this example, maintenance is performed based on the push button 31B being pressed during the setting confirmation at power-on of the gaming machine. The mode is controlled to start displaying the maintenance mode menu screen.

  If the push button 31B is not on (N in step 012IWS456), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not a command at the time of restoration has been received (step 012IWS459). If the command at the time of restoration has been received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to end the display of the setting confirmation display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS460). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the setting confirmation flag (step 012IWS461). That is, the fact that the recovery command has been received during the setting confirmation is when the setting key 012IW051 is turned off by the player and the setting confirmation processing ends (see step 012IWS043, N, step 012IWS049). Control to end the display during confirmation.

  If the maintenance mode flag is set (Y in step 012IWS451), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not it has been detected that a maintenance history selection operation has been performed by the player (step 012IWS462). . For example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether or not it has been detected that a maintenance history selection operation has been performed based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. If it is detected that the maintenance history selection operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b extracts all log information from the log area of the RAM012IW122b (step 012IWS463). Then, the second effect control CPU 012 IW 120 b performs control to display a maintenance history screen including the extracted log information as history information in the image display device 5 (step 012 IWS 464).

  If a maintenance history selection operation has not been detected (N in step 012IWS462), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not it has been detected that a setting change / confirmation history selection operation has been performed by the player ( Step 012 IWS465). For example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b confirms whether or not a setting change / confirmation history selection operation has been performed based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. If it is detected that the setting change / confirmation history selection operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b extracts all the log information for setting change and setting confirmation from the log information stored in the log area of the RAM012IW122b. (Step 012 IWS466). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b performs control to display a setting change / confirmation history screen including the extracted setting change and setting confirmation log information as history information in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS467).

  If it is not detected that the setting change / confirmation history selection operation has been performed (N in Step 012IWS465), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not a command at the time of restoration has been received (Step 012IWS468). . If the command at the time of restoration is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to delete the maintenance mode menu screen, the maintenance history screen, and the setting change / confirmation history screen in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS469). . Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the maintenance mode flag (step 012IWS470). That is, the fact that the recovery command is received during the setting confirmation is when the setting key 012IW051 is turned off by the player and the setting confirmation processing is completed (N in Step 012IWS043, Step 012IWS049). Control to end the mode.

  In this example, it is determined that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off based on the reception of the recovery command, and the maintenance mode is terminated. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in this example, since the setting value command is also transmitted when the setting key 012IW051 is turned off (see step 012IWS047), it is determined that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off based on the reception of the setting value command, and the maintenance mode is set. You may comprise so that it may complete | finish.

(Setting change time recording process)
FIG. 8-33 is a flowchart showing the setting change time recording process (step 012 IWS 212). In the setting change time recording process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first checks whether or not a setting change command has been received (step 012IWS801). If the setting change command has been received, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b inputs the date / time information from the real-time clock 012IW 126, and stores the log information in the log area of the RAM 012IW 122b using the input date / time information as the setting change start date / time (step) 012 IWS 802). Also, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets a setting change command reception flag indicating that the setting change command has been received (step 012IWS 803).

  If a setting change command has not been received (N in step 012IWS801), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether a setting confirmation command has been received (step 012IWS804). If the setting confirmation command has been received, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b inputs the date / time information from the real-time clock 012IW 126, and stores the log information in the log area of the RAM 012IW 122b using the input date / time information as the setting confirmation start date / time (step) 012 IWS805). Also, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets a setting confirmation command reception flag indicating that the setting confirmation command has been received (step 012IWS 806).

  If the setting confirmation command has not been received (N in Step 012IWS804), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the initialization designation command has been received (Step 012IWS807). If the initialization designation command has been received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the setting change command reception flag is set (step 012IWS808). If the setting change command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process is not executed and only the initialization process is executed), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b receives the date / time information from the real-time clock 012IW126. And the log information is stored in the log area of the RAM 012 IW 122 b as the RAM clear date and time (step 012 IWS 809).

  On the other hand, if the setting change command reception flag is not set (Y in step 012IWS808), that is, if both the setting change process and the initialization process are executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the set value in the RAM012IW122b. The current set value stored in the area is read (step 012 IWS 810). In this example, when the setting change process is executed, the setting value command is transmitted before the initialization designation command (see steps 012IWS047 and S052), so the setting value storage area of the RAM 012IW122b is the latest. Should be stored. Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date / time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and stores the log information in the log area of the RAM012IW122b with the input date / time information as the setting change end date / time in association with the read set value ( Step 012 IWS 811). The second effect control CPU 012IW 120b resets the set change command reception flag.

  In this example, when the setting change process is executed by executing the processes of steps 012 IWS 810 and S 811, the initialization process should be executed, but only log information related to the setting change is recorded. However, recording log information related to RAM clear is omitted, thereby preventing log information from being recorded unnecessarily.

  If the initialization command has not been received (N in step 012IWS807), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the command at the time of restoration has been received (step 012IWS812). If the command at the time of restoration is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the setting confirmation command reception flag is set (step 012IWS813). If the setting confirmation command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting confirmation processing is not executed and only the restoration processing is executed), the processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the setting confirmation command reception flag is not set (Y in step 012IWS813), that is, if both the setting confirmation processing and the restoration processing are executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the setting value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Is read out (step 012IWS814). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date / time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and stores the log information in the log area of the RAM012IW122b using the input date / time information as the setting confirmation end date / time in association with the read setting value ( Step 012 IWS815). The second effect control CPU 012IW 120b resets the setting confirmation command reception flag that has been set.

  Note that, in this example, when the setting confirmation process is not executed and only the recovery process is executed, the log information is not recorded. However, the log information may be recorded. In this case, for example, when N is determined in Step 012IWS813, the date / time information is input from the real-time clock 012IW126, and the log information is stored in the log area of the RAM012IW122b using the input date / time information as the recovery date / time.

(Current time setting process)
FIG. 8-34 is a flowchart showing the current time setting process (step 012 IWS 213). In the current time setting process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first checks whether the maintenance mode flag is set (step 012IWS821). If the maintenance mode flag is set (that is, if it is in the maintenance mode), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets whether or not the current time setting flag indicating that the current time is being set is set. (Step 012 IWS 822).

  If the current time setting flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not it has been detected that the player has performed the current time setting selection operation (step 012IWS823). For example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b confirms whether or not it has been detected that the current time setting selection operation has been performed based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. If it is detected that the current time setting selection operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start displaying the current time setting screen in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS824). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a current time setting flag (step 012IWS825).

  If the current time setting flag is set (Y of step 012IWS822), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a standby flag indicating that it is waiting until the log information of the current time setting is recorded. (Step 012 IWS 826). If the waiting flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not a time signal has been received from the first effect control CPU 012IW120a (step 012IWS827).

  In this example, as already described, detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B are first input to the first effect control CPU 012IW 120a, so that the player operates the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. When the current time setting information is input, a signal capable of specifying the input current time setting information is sequentially transmitted from the first effect control CPU 012IW 120a to the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b. In this case, in this example, the hour signal indicating the time when the setting is input, the minute signal indicating the minute, the second signal indicating the second, the year signal indicating the year, the month signal indicating the month, the day signal indicating the day, and the day of the week are displayed. It is transmitted in the order of the day signal shown. In this example, as already described, the first effect control CPU 012IW 120a generates a timer interrupt every 10 ms, and these signals are transmitted every 10 ms.

  If the time signal has been received (Y of step 012IWS827), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the time information of the real-time clock 012IW126 when indicated by the received time signal (step 012IWS828). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets a value corresponding to 500 ms to a waiting timer for measuring a waiting period until the log information of the current time setting is recorded (step 012IWS829). Also, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a waiting flag (step 012IWS830).

  If the waiting flag is set (Y in step 012IWS826), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the waiting timer has timed out (step 012IWS831). If the waiting timer has not timed out, has the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b received any of the minute signal, second signal, year signal, month signal, day signal, or day signal from the first effect control CPU 012IW 120a? It is confirmed whether or not (step 012 IWS832).

  If any signal is received (Y in step 012IWS832), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 to the information indicated by the received signal (step 012IWS833). For example, when the minute signal is received, the minute information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the amount indicated by the received minute signal. For example, when a second signal is received, the second information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the second indicated by the received second signal. For example, when an year signal is received, the year information of the real-time clock 012 IW 126 is set to the year indicated by the received year signal. For example, when a month signal is received, the month information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the month indicated by the received month signal. For example, when a date signal is received, the date information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the date indicated by the received date signal. For example, when a day signal is received, the day information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the day indicated by the received day signal.

  If the waiting timer has timed out (Y in step 012IWS831), that is, if 500 ms has elapsed since the first time signal was received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b receives the hour, minute, The date / time information of the second, year, month, day, and day of week is read (step 012 IWS834). Then, the second effect control CPU 012 IW 120 b stores the log information in the log area of the RAM 012 IW 122 b using the read date and time information as the time setting date and time (step 012 IWS 835). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the current time setting flag and the standby flag (step 012IWS836).

  FIGS. 8-35 is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting timing of the present time. When the player operates the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B to set the current time, the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B are first input to the first effect control CPU 012IW 120a. As shown in FIG. 8-35, the time signal, minute signal, second signal, year signal, month signal, day signal, and day signal are used for the first effect control every 10 ms in accordance with the setting operation by the player. CPU012IW120a sequentially transmits to second effect control CPU012IW120b.

  When receiving these signals, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b immediately sets the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 based on the received signals as shown in FIG. 8-35. As shown in FIG. 8-35, when the time signal is received, the time information of the real-time clock 012IW 126 is immediately set based on the received time signal. When the minute signal is received 10 ms later, the minute information of the real-time clock 012 IW 126 is immediately set based on the received minute signal. When the second signal is received 10 ms later, the second information of the real-time clock 012 IW 126 is immediately set based on the received second signal. When the year signal is received 10 ms later, the year information of the real-time clock 012 IW 126 is immediately set based on the received year signal. When the month signal is received 10 ms later, the month information of the real-time clock 012 IW 126 is immediately set based on the received month signal. When the date signal is received 10 ms later, the date information of the real-time clock 012 IW 126 is immediately set based on the received date signal. Further, when the day of the week signal is received 10 ms later, the day of the week information of the real-time clock 012IW 126 is immediately set based on the received day of the week signal.

  On the other hand, the log information of the time setting date and time is not recorded immediately, the waiting timer is set when the first hour signal is received, and the waiting timer times out, as shown in FIG. After waiting for 500 ms after receiving the signal, the date / time information from the real-time clock 012 IW 126 is read out and recorded in the log information as the time setting date / time.

  If the current time setting operation is further performed by the player before 500 ms has elapsed since the time signal was received, another time signal, minute signal, second signal, In some cases, the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set by receiving the year signal, the month signal, the day signal, and the day-of-week signal. In this example, the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set whenever necessary. Therefore, the log information of the time setting date and time is recorded based on the date and time information of the real-time clock 012IW 126 set based on the signal received last.

  If each time signal, minute signal, second signal, second signal, year signal, month signal, day signal, day of week signal that is transmitted individually is recorded as log information, the log information of the current time setting becomes redundant more than necessary. However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-35, the log information of the time setting date and time is recorded after waiting until all signals related to the time setting are received. Preventing redundancy.

  In this example, a case where a first effect control CPU 012IW120a to which a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B is primarily input is provided in addition to the second effect control CPU012IW120b is shown. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, an input circuit to which detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B are input is provided, and an hour signal, a minute signal, a second signal, a year signal, a month signal, a day signal, and a day signal are sequentially input from the input circuit. It may be configured to be transmitted to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b. As long as the signal according to the operation in some form is sequentially transmitted to the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b, it may be used.

  Also, in this example, the case where the real time clock 012IW126 is mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b side is shown, but the real time clock is mounted on the first effect control board 012IW12a side, so that it can be operated by the player. Accordingly, the date / time information of the real-time clock may be updated as needed on the first effect control CPU 012IW 120a side. Then, the first effect control CPU 012IW120a transmits the updated date and time information of the real time clock to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b updates the counter and the like based on the received date and time information. You may comprise so that management of this may be performed.

(Power interruption date and time recording process)
FIG. 8-36 is a flowchart showing the power interruption date and time recording process (step 012 IWS 214). In the power interruption date and time recording process, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b first checks whether or not a temporary storage enable flag indicating that temporary storage of date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW 126 is permitted is set (step 012 IWS841). ). If the temporary storage enable flag is set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the temporary storage timer for measuring the time for temporarily storing the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126 has timed out ( Step 012 IWS 842). If the temporary storage timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b reads the date / time information from the real-time clock 012IW126 and stores the read date / time information in a temporary area provided in the RAM 012IW122b (step 012IWS843). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to 100 ms in the temporary storage timer (step 012IWS844).

  The date and time information is stored every 100 ms in the temporary area of the RAM 012IW 122b. However, when the previous date and time information is stored in the temporary area, new date and time information is temporarily overwritten every 100 ms. It shall be stored in the area.

  If the temporary storage flag is not set (N in step 012IWS841), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether an initialization designation command or a recovery command has been received (step 012IWS845). If the initialization designation command or the command at the time of restoration has been received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the log information of the previous power-on date / time is stored in the log area of the RAM012IW122b (step 012IWS846). ). If the log information of the previous power-on date / time is not stored (N in step 012IWS846), the process proceeds to step 012IWS849. If the log information of the previous power-on date / time is stored (Y in step 012IWS846), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b reads the date / time information stored in the temporary area of the RAM012IW122b, and the read date / time information is disconnected. Log information is stored in the log area of the RAM 012IW122b as the date and time (step 012IWS847). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS849.

  If neither the initialization designation command nor the command at the time of restoration has been received (N in step 012IWS845), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b turns on other commands (however, a setting confirmation command, a setting change command, etc.) It is confirmed whether or not (except for commands transmitted at times) has been received (step 012 IWS 848). If another command has been received, for example, if a variation pattern command or a display result designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS849.

  In step 012IWS849, second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a temporary storage enable flag (step 012IWS849). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to 100 ms in the temporary storage timer (step 012IWS844).

  When the temporary storage enable flag is set in step 012IWS849, the temporary storage enable flag is maintained until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped or the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is reset. Then, when the production control main process shown in FIG. 8-16 is started due to the power-on to the gaming machine or the occurrence of a system reset, it is reset by the initialization process of step 012IWS201.

  FIG. 8-37 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the recording timing of the log information of the power interruption date and time. As shown in FIG. 8-37, when the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is being activated, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is determined to be Y in step 012IWS841 of the power interruption date and time recording process, and steps 012IWS842 to S844. By executing this process, the date and time information is temporarily stored in the temporary area of the RAM 012IW 122b every 100 ms.

  Next, when the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped or a system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b occurs, initialization processing (see step 012IWS201) is executed, and the temporary storage enable flag is reset, the second effect control Even if the CPU 012 IW 120 b returns to the active state, it is determined as N in Step 012 IWS 841 of the power interruption date recording process, and the temporary storage of the date information every 100 ms is not executed, but is stored last in the temporary area of the RAM 012 IW 122 b. Date and time information is maintained.

  If power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then power supply to the gaming machine is started, at least an initialization designation command or a recovery command should be received. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (1), on the condition that the initialization designation command or the recovery command is received, the date and time information maintained in the temporary area is read and the read date and time are read. The log information is stored in the log area with the information as the power interruption date (Y in step 012 IWS 845, see step 012 IWS 847). Thereafter, the temporary storage enable flag is set, and the temporary storage of date and time information every 100 ms is resumed (see steps 012 IWS849 and S850). However, in this example, the log information on the power-on date / time is also recorded (see step 012 IWS 203), but the log information on the power-on date / time before the occurrence of the power interruption is not recorded. Since there is a possibility that some abnormality has occurred, in this case, the log information of the power interruption date / time is not recorded (refer to N in step 012 IWS846).

  On the other hand, if a system reset or the like of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b occurs, the power supply of the gaming machine itself is not stopped, but an initialization designation command, a recovery command, etc. from the gaming control microcomputer 100 The power-on command is not sent. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (2), if the initialization designation command or the recovery command is not received, it is determined that the interruption of the gaming machine itself has not occurred. Thus, control is performed so that the log information is not recorded with the date and time information maintained in the temporary area as the power interruption date and time. In this case, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (2), on the basis of receiving other commands (excluding commands transmitted at power-on such as setting confirmation commands and setting change commands), for example, Based on the reception of the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, etc., the temporary storage enable flag is set, and the temporary storage of date and time information every 100 ms is resumed (see steps 012 IWS849 and S850).

  If it is configured to record the log information of the power interruption date / time based only on the detection of the stop on the second effect control CPU 012IW120b side, a system reset or the like of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b occurs (first 2) When the power of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is temporarily stopped due to the system reset of the CPU212W for effect control, the log information of the power interruption date and time is also recorded. There is a possibility that log information on the date and time of power failure will be recorded even though the power failure of the machine itself has not occurred. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-37, the date and time when the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is stopped is temporarily stored as a temporary power interruption date and time, an initialization designation command, a command at the time of restoration, etc. It is configured to record the log information of the power interruption date and time on condition that a command at power-on is received, so that such a situation does not occur.

  In this example, it is assumed that the power failure of the gaming machine itself has occurred and the power interruption date and time is recorded in the log information on the condition that the initialization designation command or the recovery command has been received. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the power interruption date and time may be recorded in the log information based on the reception of another command transmitted at power-on such as a setting confirmation command or a setting change command.

  In this example, the log information is not recorded in the case where the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b or the like occurs instead of the power interruption of the gaming machine itself. I can't. For example, an area for recording log information for a gaming machine manufacturer is provided separately from an area for recording log information for a game store, and the occurrence date and time such as system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is recorded as log information. As such, it may be configured to record in the area for the gaming machine manufacturer. With this configuration, log information can be used as information for development by a gaming machine manufacturer.

  Next, a specific example of the display screen in the maintenance mode will be described. 8-40 to FIG. 8-43 are explanatory diagrams for describing a specific example of the display screen in the maintenance mode. In addition, in FIG. 8-40-FIGS. 8-43, a display screen changes in order of (A) (B) (C) ....

  First, a specific example of a display screen when a maintenance history selection operation is performed during the maintenance mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-40 and 8-41. When the setting confirmation command is received when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, as shown in FIG. 8-40 (A), a character display such as “Setting confirmation is in progress” is displayed on the image display device 5. The setting confirmation display is started (see steps 012IWS453 to S455). Also, as shown in FIG. 8-40 (A), when the setting confirmation display is being displayed, a character display such as “Transfer to maintenance mode when the push button is pressed” is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, a display prompting an operation for shifting to the maintenance mode is displayed.

  Next, when the player presses the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 8-40 (B), the maintenance mode menu screen is displayed on the image display device 5, and the maintenance mode is entered (see steps 012IWS456 to S458). As shown in FIG. 8-40 (B), options for “maintenance history”, “setting change / confirmation history”, and “current time setting” are displayed on the maintenance mode menu screen, and the current time is displayed. It is displayed.

  When the “maintenance history” option 012IW106 is selected, as shown in FIG. 8-40 (C), the image display device 5 switches to the display of the maintenance history screen. As shown in FIG. 8-40 (C), on the maintenance history screen, the date and time and the log contents are displayed in association with each other, and the latest log information is displayed in order so as to be higher. In the example shown in FIG. 8-40 (C), an illegal winning error indicating that an illegal winning in a winning mouth such as the first big winning mouth or the second big winning mouth is detected, the first count switch 012IW023a or the second count is shown. Log information of a switch abnormality error indicating that an abnormality of various switches such as the switch 012IW023b has been detected, a prize ball error indicating that a prize ball abnormality has been detected, and a magnet error indicating that an abnormal magnetism has been detected is displayed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 8-40 (C), log information indicating that the probability variation is not established is also displayed (see steps 012IWS958 to S960).

  In addition, when there are a plurality of maintenance history screens, when the next page is selected, as shown in FIG. 8-40 (D), the screen moves to the second page of the maintenance history screen. In the example shown in FIG. 8-40 (D), log information of setting change start and setting change end (see steps 012IWS802 and S811), power-off date / time and power-on date / time are displayed (step 012 IWS203, S847). Also, in the example shown in FIG. 8-40 (D), log information of left-handed notification and full tank notification is also displayed (see steps 012IWS117 and S145).

  In addition, when there is a next page, when the next page is selected, as shown in FIG. 8-41 (E), the screen moves to the third page of the maintenance history screen, and further the next page is displayed. When the selection operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 8-41 (F), the screen shifts to the fourth page of the maintenance history screen. In the example shown in FIG. 8-41 (E), log information indicating the start of setting confirmation and the end of setting confirmation is displayed (see steps 012 IWS805 and S815), and the current time is set during the maintenance mode during setting confirmation. The log information to that effect is also displayed (see step 012 IWS 835).

  In this example, when the current time is set, the date and time information after the setting is read and the log information is recorded. Therefore, there may be a date and time mismatch before and after the current time setting. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 8-41 (E), the setting confirmation was started at 09:36:28 on 2018/03/21 (Wednesday), whereas the current time was set. It is set to 09:36:16 on 2018/03/21 (Wednesday), and the time is earlier than the start of setting confirmation. Thus, in this example, even when the date and time are not consistent before and after the current time setting, the log information is recorded in the log area in the order in which the log information is generated, as shown in FIG. 8-41 (E). The log information is displayed in the order in which the log information is generated.

  In the example shown in FIG. 8-41 (F), log information of an RWM abnormality error (see steps 012IWS017 to S020) indicating that some kind of RAM abnormality has occurred at the time of power-on to the gaming machine is displayed. Since the RWM abnormality error occurred, the game store clerk once stopped the power supply of the gaming machine and then turned on the power again while turning on the clear switch, as shown in FIG. 8-41 (E). Log information indicating that the conversion processing has been executed is also displayed (see step IWS 809).

  Next, a specific example of a display screen when a setting change / confirmation history selection operation is performed during the maintenance mode will be described with reference to FIGS. While the setting confirmation display shown in FIG. 8-42 (A) is displayed, the player presses the push button 31B to display the maintenance mode menu screen shown in FIG. 8-42 (B). Assume that the selection 012 IW 107 of “setting change / confirmation history” is selected during display.

  When the option 012 IW 107 for “setting change / confirmation history” is selected, as shown in FIG. 8-42 (C), the display is switched to the setting change / confirmation history screen on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 8-42 (C), on the setting change / confirmation history screen, the date and time, whether it is a setting change or setting confirmation, and the changed setting value or the confirmed setting value are displayed in association with each other. The latest log information is displayed in order so as to be higher.

  Next, a specific example of the display screen when the current time setting selection operation is performed during the maintenance mode will be described with reference to FIGS. While the setting confirmation display shown in FIG. 8-43 (A) is displayed, the player presses the push button 31B to display the maintenance mode menu screen shown in FIG. 8-43 (B). It is assumed that the “current time setting” option 012IW108 is selected and operated during display.

  When the option 012IW108 of “current time setting” is selected, the display is switched to the display of the current time setting screen in the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 8-43 (C) and 8-43 (D), the year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, or second items are selected by tilting the left and right of the stick controller 31A, and the stick A number for each item is selected by a tilting operation before and after the controller 31A. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 8-43 (C), when it is desired to change the hour from 16 to 15, the stick controller 31A is tilted four times in the right direction to move to the hour item, and the stick controller 31A is moved. What is necessary is just to change it from "16" to "15" by tilting once in the forward direction (frontward with respect to the player). Then, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (D), when the player presses the push button 31B, the current date and time is set to the currently displayed date and time.

  In the feature unit 012IW, the effect effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. For example, an error displayed on the image display device 9 when an error occurs is displayed. The display is also executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. That is, the error display is displayed in preference to the big hit suggestion effect (or the pre-game suggestion effect or the in-game suggestion effect). With such a configuration, occurrence of an error can be appropriately notified. In addition, when a predetermined effect that can be executed simultaneously with the big hit suggestion effect (for example, a specific effect aspect of the fanfare effect) is provided, and the predetermined effect is an aspect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestion effect. The priority may be given to the suggestion effect during the big hit. Specifically, when the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect is in a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the image displayed by the big hit suggestion effect, it is displayed by the big hit suggestion effect. You may make it display an image preferentially. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit.

  Further, in the feature unit 012IW, the decorative design is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but the decorative design is variably displayed by driving a drum-shaped movable body having the decorative design on the surface. (That is, it may be applied to a so-called drum-type game machine). Alternatively, the decorative symbols may be variably displayed by driving a belt-like movable body having decorative symbols on the surface (that is, the decorative symbols may be applied to a so-called belt reel type game machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel type gaming machine, the drum-like or belt-like movable body performs a characteristic operation different from the normal time at the start of the first fluctuation after the setting change (or the feature). May occur). Therefore, in the first-time fluctuation after changing the setting, a light guide plate effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the fluctuation may be executed (or the execution ratio is increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

  In addition, in this feature part 012IW, the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect are configured to reduce the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced by executing the accessory effect or the light guide plate effect. Also in this case, the visibility may be lowered at a high rate when an undesirable suggestion is made to the player. For example, when even-numbered initial outcomes are displayed, when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the suggestion effect during game of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility is reduced. As described above, it is possible to increase the ratio of executing the effect effect in which the movable member operates and the light guide plate effect in which characters and pictures are displayed by the light guide plate. Further, the present invention is not limited to an effect effect or a light guide plate effect, but includes an effect including a control for outputting a predetermined sound, a control for vibrating the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and a control for causing a decorative light emitter such as a decoration LED to emit light in a predetermined manner. By performing the above, the player's attention may be directed to others, and the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced (or made difficult to notice).

  Further, in addition to the setting suggestion effect of the feature unit 012IW, a simultaneous effect executed based on the measurement result (measurement result using the measurement timer or the real-time clock 012IW126 set when the power is turned on) is executed in a specific manner. Thus, the setting may be suggested.

  Further, a setting suggestion effect (for example, a predetermined image) that suggests setting according to the number of times that the variable display is continuously executed without the hold memory being 0 or the number of start winnings exceeding the upper limit hold memory number is generated. Display control, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, etc.) may be executed.

  Further, a setting suggestion effect (for example, display control of a predetermined image, output control of a predetermined sound, predetermined control, etc.) based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B in a predetermined operation effective period. (E.g., light emission control of the lamp) may be executed.

  Although the characteristic unit 012IW has been described with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention can be modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention. included.

(Modification 1)
For example, in the feature portion 012IW, the form in which the security cover 012IW500A is fixed to the outer frame 012IW001a is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 012IW003 side. Also good. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-44 (A) and 8-44 (B) as a first modification, a security cover 012IW500B composed of a short piece 012IW500Ba and a long piece 012IW500Bb is attached to a substrate case 012IW201, for example. Thus, the right end portion of the long piece 012IW500Bb is provided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction between a covering position covering the right side portion of the substrate case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 and a covering releasing position on the right side of the covering position.

  On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 012IW201, so that the setting is made through the through-hole 012IW500Bc formed in the left part of the long piece 012IW500Bb. The key 012IW051 may be operated. That is, in the first modification, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the sliding movement in the left-right direction with respect to the substrate case 012IW201 is performed with the security cover 012IW500B (long piece 012IW500Bb) covering the setting key 012IW051. By being regulated, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in a regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is released by sliding the security cover 012IW500B to the right with respect to the board case 012IW201 to release the state where the setting key 012IW051 is covered. It is possible to make a state in which the restriction state can be released (change to an allowable state).

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-44 (A) and 8-44 (B), when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the protruding dimension of the security cover 012IW500B from the board case 012IW201 is the length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the protruding dimension of the security cover 012IW500B from the board case 012IW201 is extended to the length L2 by sliding the security cover 012IW500B with respect to the board case 012IW201. (L2> L1).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 8-45 (A), when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is rotated about a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 012IW500B has a protruding dimension from the board case 012IW201. By sliding the board case 012IW201 until the length becomes L2 (putting the pachinko gaming machine 1 into an allowable state), the store clerk or the like of the game hall operates the setting key 012IW051 to set the value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state, the security cover 012IW500B is attached to the board case 012IW201 until the protruding dimension from the board case 012IW201 becomes the length L1, as shown in FIG. 8-45 (B). On the other hand, the security cover 012IW500B comes into contact with the front end portion of the outer frame 012IW001a unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the restricted state, and it is impossible to close the gaming machine frame 012IW003. It has become.

  For this reason, in the first modification, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 012IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permitted state, and therefore the setting key 012IW051 is covered by the security cover 012IW500B. Forgetting to do it, that is, closing the gaming machine frame 012IW003 without restricting the operation on the operation unit can be prevented, and the security can be improved.

  In the state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 012IW500Ba is disposed between the outer frame 012IW001a and the gaming machine frame 012IW003, so that movement in the left-right direction from the covering position is restricted. However, the security cover 012IW500B may be moved in the left-right direction as long as the state in which the setting key 012IW051 is covered by the security cover 012IW500B is maintained.

(Modification 2)
Furthermore, as a form in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 012IW003 side, as shown in FIGS. 8-46 (A) and 8-46 (B) as a second modification, the left end of the security cover 012IW500C is attached to the gaming machine. Between the covering position covering the right side of the substrate case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 and the covering releasing position rotated from the covering position around the pivot axis 012IW500Cd that is provided on the back side of the frame 012IW003 and faces the vertical direction It may be pivotally supported by. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the front end portion of the short piece 012IW500Ca is locked to the locking portion 012IW500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 012IW001a, and the long piece 012IW500Cb is placed on the back side of the setting key 012IW051. It is only necessary that the rotation from the covered state to the back side is restricted.

  When the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the state where the setting key 012IW051 is covered is released by rotating the security cover 012IW500C around the pivot 012IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 012IW201. Can be operated. That is, in the second modification, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the pachinko gaming machine is controlled by the rotation being restricted with the security cover 012IW500C (long piece 012IW500Cb) covering the setting key 012IW051. 1 is maintained in a regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500C is rotated around the pivot 012IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 012IW201 to release the state where the setting key 012IW051 is covered. By doing so, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state where it can be released from the restricted state (can be changed to an allowable state).

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-47 (A), the security cover 012IW500C in the second modification is rotated around the pivot 012IW500Cd (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is allowed), so that The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by the store clerk operating the setting key 012IW051. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permitted state, as shown in FIG. 8-47 (B), the security cover 012IW500C is rotated in the clockwise direction in plan view and the setting key is set by the security cover 012IW500C. If 012IW051 is not covered (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed to the restricted state), the security cover 012IW500C will abut against the front end of the outer frame 012IW001a, and it is impossible to close the gaming machine frame 012IW003. It has become.

  For this reason, in the second modification, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 012IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permitted state, so that the setting key 012IW051 is covered by the security cover 012IW500C. Forgetting to do it, that is, closing the gaming machine frame 012IW003 without restricting the operation on the operation unit can be prevented, and the security can be improved.

(Modification 3)
Moreover, in the feature part 012IW, the form in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable by opening 012IW003a. When the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 012IW003a in this way, a modification 3 is shown in FIGS. 8-48 (A) to 8-48 (C). In this way, a through-hole 012IW003b is formed below the gaming machine frame 012IW003, and the setting key 012IW051 can be operated through the through-hole 012IW003b. In this case, the mounting surface such as an IC on the main board 11 is arranged toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting key 012IW051 is arranged on the surface of the main board 11 opposite to the mounting surface. .

  When the setting key 012IW051 can be operated through the through-hole 012IW003b as described above, a door body 012IW003c capable of opening and closing the through-hole 012IW003b is provided, and the setting key 012IW051 is set in a state where the door body 012IW003c is closed. Operation may be restricted. As shown in FIGS. 8-48 (B) and 8-48 (C), when the door body 012IW003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 012IW003, the door body is closed by closing the glass door frame 012IW003a. Since 012IW003c is sandwiched between the glass door frame 012IW003a and the gaming machine frame 012IW003, the setting key 012IW051 is strongly prevented from being illegally operated when the glass door frame 012IW003a is closed. And security can be improved.

(Modification 4)
Further, the information that can be recorded as log information is not limited to the information indicated by the feature unit 012IW, and various log information can be recorded. 8-49 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the maintenance history screen according to the fourth modification. In the fourth modification, information indicating that setting suggestion is unsuccessful or “point assignment unsuccessful” is recorded as log information and is configured to be displayed on the maintenance history screen. “Setting suggestion unsuccessful” log information 012IW109a means that the player does not perform an operation or the operation means malfunctions even though the execution condition of the setting value suggestion effect that suggests the current setting value is established Thus, the log information indicates that the set value suggesting effect has not been executed or the set value suggesting effect having a low suggestion accuracy has been executed. In addition, the log information 012IW109b of “unsuccessful point grant” means that the player does not perform an operation even if the point granting conditions necessary for customizing the display screen of the image display device 5 and acquiring image content are satisfied. Log information indicating that points have not been given due to reasons such as failure of operating means. In this way, it may be configured such that a profit related to the production or a profit related to the content can be given in some form and the log information thereof is recorded.

  Further, for example, in a gaming machine provided with a sorting device that alternately distributes game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, five) is continuously provided to any one of the starting winning openings. ) May be detected as a start unit abnormality error and recorded in log information, and displayed on the maintenance history screen. Also, for example, a vibration error indicating that abnormal vibration has been detected in a gaming machine or a radio wave error indicating that abnormal radio waves have been detected may be recorded as log information and displayed on the maintenance history screen. Often, various forms of log information can be considered.

  As described above, according to the feature unit 012IW, the setting is set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, the setting value “1” to the setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player. Is possible. In addition, a storage area (for example, the RAM 102) that can store information generated during the game is provided, and history information (for example, log information) of abnormalities related to the game can be specified and displayed. An initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1) for initialization can be executed, and when the initialization process is executed, a setting change process (for example, a setting change process) for changing a setting value is executed. Is possible. In addition, when the initialization process is executed and the setting change process is not executed, it can be specified that the initialization process has been executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-41 (E)). When the initialization process and the setting change process are executed, the setting change process is executed without displaying that the initialization process has been executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-40 (D), only log information indicating the end of the setting change is displayed). Therefore, since unnecessary information is not displayed, it is possible to prevent the history information from being difficult to confirm. That is, in this example, when the setting change process is executed, the initialization process is assumed to be executed, but if the log information of the setting change is displayed, the initialization process has been executed. Since it is self-evident, it is redundant to record and display the log information of the initialization process. Accordingly, by not recording and displaying unnecessary initialization processing log information, it is possible to prevent unnecessary log information from being recorded and to prevent the history information from being difficult to confirm.

  Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, it is possible to execute a setting confirmation process (for example, a setting confirmation process) for confirming a setting value, and to detect a player's action during the execution of the setting confirmation process. Based on the fact that the push button 31B is pressed during the display of the setting confirmation display as shown in FIGS. Maintenance mode menu screen is displayed). Therefore, it is possible to suitably check the history information.

  In addition, according to the feature part 012IW, the game control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) that controls the game, and the control of effects based on the information from the game control means. Effect control means (for example, second effect control CPU 012IW120b). The game control means can output initialization information (for example, initialization designation command) indicating that the initialization process has been executed, and setting change information (for example, indicating that the setting change process is to be executed) , Setting change command) can be output. Further, the effect control means can display different history information so as to be able to be specified depending on whether or not the initialization information and the setting change information are output (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has an initialization designation command). Based on the fact that the setting change command has been received, log information indicating the end of the setting change is recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 8-40 (D). Therefore, it is possible to suitably check the history information.

  Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, a predetermined abnormality (for example, a left-handed notification state) can be detected, and a history storage unit (for example, a log area of the RAM012IW122b) capable of storing history information is provided. In addition, a first abnormal state (for example, a first left-handed notification state) indicating that the predetermined abnormality has a predetermined importance, and a first abnormality indicating that the predetermined abnormality is higher in importance than the first abnormal state. Information indicating that the second abnormal state has been detected without storing information indicating that the first abnormal state has been detected as history information, and capable of detecting two abnormal states (for example, the second left-hand notification state). Can be stored as history information (for example, log information is recorded only when the second left-hand notification state occurs). Therefore, it is possible to store history information suitably.

  Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, the first abnormality (for example, the first left-handed notification state) and the second abnormality (for example, the second left-handed notification state) having a higher importance than the first abnormality are provided. It can be detected. In addition, a history storage means (for example, a log area of the RAM 012IW122b) capable of storing abnormal history information relating to the game is provided, and the history information stored in the history storage means can be displayed in an identifiable manner (for example, FIGS. 8-40 and A maintenance history screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-41. In addition, when the second abnormality is detected, information indicating that the second abnormality is detected is stored as history information, and when the first abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection unit, the first abnormality is detected. Information indicating that this has been done is not stored as history information (for example, log information is recorded only when the second left notification state occurs, and log information is not recorded even when the first left notification state occurs). Therefore, the history information can be stored and displayed suitably. That is, since the storage capacity of the log information is also limited, there is a possibility that the necessary abnormality history may be erased early if it is recorded as log information before the first abnormality of low importance. Then, since only the second or higher importance is recorded, the history information can be suitably stored and displayed.

  Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, the second abnormality is detected according to the detection result of the first abnormality per unit period (for example, based on the fact that the execution conditions for two first left-hand notifications are satisfied) The second left-handed notification execution condition is established). Therefore, the history information can be stored and displayed suitably.

  In this example, the second left-handed notification execution condition is satisfied according to the number of times the first left-handed notification execution condition is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, based on the fact that the execution condition of the first left-hand notification is continued for a predetermined period, it is determined that the execution condition of the second left-hand notification is satisfied and the second left-hand notification is executed. Also good.

  Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, it is possible to notify that the first abnormality is detected and that the second abnormality is detected (for example, the first left-hand notification and the second left-hand notification are executed). ). In this case, it is possible to notify that the first abnormality is detected in a predetermined manner, and it is possible to notify that the second abnormality is detected in a manner different from the predetermined manner (for example, in the first left-handed notification, Only the left-handed notification display is displayed. In the second left-handed notification, in addition to the left-handed notification display, all the game effect lamps 9 and the sound of the notification sound are output). Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the abnormality.

  Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, it is possible to detect a plurality of types of first abnormality and second abnormality (for example, in addition to the first left-hand notification state and the second left-hand notification state, the first full notification) Status and the second full notification state are detected). Further, the first abnormality and the second abnormality are detected according to detection conditions that differ depending on the type of the first abnormality and the second abnormality (for example, the first left-handed notification state and the second left-handed notification state are passed to the pass gate 012IW041. On the other hand, in the first full tank notification state and the second full tank notification state, the hit state of the hitting ball supply tray (lower plate) is 10 Judgment based on whether it lasts seconds or 30 seconds) Therefore, the history information can be stored and displayed suitably.

  In addition, in this example, although the case where full tank alerting is performed other than left-handed alerting is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it is configured to perform an abnormal winning notification, a magnet error notification, a ball clogging error notification, and the like. For these, there are a first notification having a low importance level and a second notification having a high importance level. The log information may be recorded only when executed and displayed on the maintenance history screen.

  Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, predetermined control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) and specific control means for performing control based on information from the predetermined control means (for example, The specific control means can temporarily store the date and time when the power supply to the specific control means is stopped (for example, the date and time information is stored in the temporary area of the RAM 012IW 122b every 100 ms). When the power supply to the specific control means is started, information (for example, an initialization designation command, a recovery command) that can specify that the power supply output by the predetermined control means is started. Based on what you entered, you can store the temporarily stored date and time as a power outage date (for example, (The log information is stored in the log area as the date and time.) Therefore, it is possible to suitably store the power interruption date and time, that is, when the power failure of the gaming machine itself occurs, the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, etc. Even when the occurrence of the power failure occurs, it is possible to prevent the situation that both are recorded as the power interruption date and time, and to appropriately store the power interruption date and time.

  In addition, according to the feature unit 012IW, when power supply to the specific control unit is started, when information that can specify that the power supply has started cannot be input, the temporarily stored date and time is set as the power-off date and time. Not stored (for example, when an initialization designation command or a recovery command is not received, log information is not stored in the log area as a power interruption date and time). Therefore, the power interruption date and time can be suitably stored.

  Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, the date and time can be temporarily stored at a predetermined timing (for example, 100 ms) (for example, the date and time information is stored in a temporary area of the RAM 012IW 122b). Therefore, the power interruption date and time can be suitably stored.

  In this example, the date and time information is temporarily stored every 100 ms. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, only when the stop of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is detected, the current date and time information may be temporarily stored and stored as a temporary power interruption date and time.

  Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, the temporary storage of the date and time at every predetermined timing is stopped based on the fact that the power supply to the specific control unit is stopped (for example, the temporary storage enable flag is reset and the date and time at every 100 ms is reset). The temporary storage of information is not executed). Then, based on the input of predetermined information (for example, an initialization designation command, a command at the time of recovery, or another command) output by the predetermined control means, temporary storage of the date and time at each predetermined timing is resumed (for example, The temporary storage flag is set, and the temporary storage of the date / time information every 100 ms is resumed). Therefore, the power interruption date and time can be suitably stored.

  Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, the specific control unit can store the date and time when power supply to the specific control unit is started (for example, the power-on date and time is recorded as log information). Also, when the date and time when power supply is started is not stored, the temporarily stored date and time is not stored as the power-off date and time (for example, when log information of the power-on date and time before the occurrence of power-off is not recorded) Does not record the log information of the power interruption date and time). As a result, an abnormal storage state can be prevented. That is, since there is no record that the gaming machine has been turned on, it is possible to prevent an abnormal state in which the power interruption date and time is recorded.

  Further, according to the feature part 012IW, the first control means (for example, the first effect control CPU 012IW120a) and the second control means (for example, the second effect control) that performs control based on information from the first control means. CPU 012IW120b). In addition, the first control means sequentially outputs a plurality of information related to date and time changes to the second control means over a predetermined period based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, elapse of 10 ms) (for example, hour signal, minute signal) , Second signal, year signal, month signal, day signal, and day signal). In addition, the second control unit stores the date / time change history after a specific period of time that is equal to or longer than a predetermined period after inputting a part of the plurality of pieces of information related to the date / time change (for example, FIG. 8- As shown in 35, after waiting for 500 ms to elapse after receiving the time signal, the time setting date and time is recorded in the log information). Therefore, the date / time change history can be suitably stored.

  Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, the second control unit changes the internal date and time information every time information related to the date and time change is input (for example, as shown in FIG. The information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the hour signal, minute signal, second signal, year signal, month signal, day signal, or day signal). Therefore, the date / time change history can be suitably stored.

  Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, when the second control unit inputs information related to the change of the date and time a plurality of times before the specific period elapses, the second control means Save the change history (for example, if more time signal, minute signal, second signal, year signal, month signal, day signal, day of the week signal are received before 500 ms elapses, based on the last received signal Log information of the time setting date / time is recorded based on the date / time information of the set real-time clock 012IW 126). Therefore, the date / time change history can be suitably stored.

  Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, the second control unit can display the date / time change history (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-41 (E), the current time setting is performed on the maintenance history screen). Log information to the effect) Further, the date change history is stored and displayed according to the changed date (for example, the date information is read from the real-time clock 012IW 126 after setting and the log information is recorded as the time setting date). Therefore, the date / time change history can be suitably stored.

  Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, the second control unit stores the history information according to the order in which the abnormality relating to the game occurs regardless of the change of the date and time (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-41 (E)). Even if the date and time are not consistent before and after the current time setting, the log information is recorded in the log area in the order in which the log information is generated, and the log information is displayed in the order in which the log information is generated). For this reason, it is possible to suitably store abnormality history information.

  Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, a profit can be given to the player based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball has won the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). (For example, control is made to a certain change state after the big hit game is finished). In addition, the specific condition can be satisfied based on at least a predetermined condition being satisfied (for example, a probability variation big hit). In addition, when the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to store specific information (for example, log information on the probability change non-establishment date and time) that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied. . Therefore, information can be suitably stored. That is, troubles other than errors can be recorded, and information can be suitably stored.

  Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, it is possible to give a profit related to the production or a profit related to the content (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-49, log information 012IW109a of “setting suggestion failure” Log information 012IW109b. Therefore, information can be suitably stored.

  In this example, regarding the profit, when the V prize is not established and the probability change is not established, when the setting suggestion is unsuccessful, or when the point assignment is unsuccessful, the log information is recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in a gaming machine that is configured to perform an accessory game that shifts to a jackpot game based on the winning of a game ball in a specific area (V winning area) in the bonus game, the gaming ball wins in the V winning area. If there is no log information, log information may be recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen. Further, for example, log information may be recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen when a low set value is suggested although a set value suggesting effect has been executed. Further, for example, log information may be recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen when it is not displayed or output in a scene where an image with low appearance frequency or audio output is expected. Further, for example, when applied to a slot machine, log information may be recorded and displayed on a maintenance history screen when the push order is wrong when push order navigation is being executed. As such, various aspects can be considered as “profit”.

  Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, the specific information can be displayed so as to be recognizable (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8-49, log information 012IW109a of “setting suggestion unsuccessful” or log information 012IW109b of “point assignment unsuccessful” is displayed on the maintenance history screen). Therefore, information can be displayed suitably.

  In this example, the probability change failure date and time, the setting suggestion failure, and the point assignment failure log information are displayed on the maintenance history screen, but may be configured not to be displayed on the maintenance history screen. Then, it may be configured such that it can be used for the development of a gaming machine by confirming what kind of trouble has occurred on the gaming machine manufacturer side.

  In addition, according to the feature unit 012IW, information including specific information can be output as a two-dimensional code (for example, a two-dimensional code including log information on the probability variation failure date and time is generated and displayed). Therefore, information can be output suitably.

  In this example, the log information is recorded in association with date / time information including both date and time. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, log information may be recorded in association with date information including only year, month, and day, or log information may be recorded in association with time information including only hours, minutes, and seconds. Also good. As such, various modes are conceivable as a method for recording log information. Similarly, in this feature 012IW, “date and time” is not limited to including both date information and time information, but also includes only date information and includes only time information. It is a concept that includes cases.

The feature unit 012IW includes the second invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for a player, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A . Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that setting change processing is executed when the power switch is operated to the ON side with the front frame opened and the setting key switch operated to the ON side. . In the setting change process, it is described that the RAM area other than the setting value storage means is cleared. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, in the gaming machine configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, it is not always appropriate. Processing may not be possible. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for a player,
An operation means (for example, a clear switch) provided to execute an initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1 process, RAM clear 2 process) based on the operation when power supply to the gaming machine is started. When,
Specific information storage means (for example, RAM012IW122b) capable of storing specific information (for example, RAM clear flag) indicating that the operation means has been operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started;
When executing a plurality of processes including a setting value changing process for changing a setting value, a process executing means for executing the process using the specific information a plurality of times (for example, step 012IWS025 in the game control microcomputer 100) A portion that executes S034 and S048). According to this feature, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player is set. In the gaming machine configured to be settable, processing can be suitably performed. In particular, in processing that takes a certain amount of processing time to change the set value, it is preferable to store specific information (in this example, a RAM clear flag), check the RAM clear flag, and execute the processing. It can be performed.

  In this example, as a process to be executed “using specific information a plurality of times”, a setting confirmation command or a setting change command is transmitted in steps 012IWS026 and S207 depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set in step 012IWS025. Control whether to execute the process of changing the set values in steps 012IWS035 to S042 depending on whether the RAM clear flag is set in step 012IWS034, or clear the RAM in step 012IWS048. Although the case where the restoration process of steps 012IWS049 and S051 or the RAM clear 1 process is executed depending on whether or not the flag is set is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be controlled whether or not to enable the operation switch immediately before the operation of changing the setting value depending on whether or not the specific information (RAM clear flag) is set.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention,
In the set value changing process, the process executing means changes the set value based on the operation of the operating means (for example, a part for executing steps 012IWS039 to S042 in the game control microcomputer 100).
According to such a configuration, since the operation means can be also used, an increase in cost can be suppressed. In other words, in this example, the clear switch can be used as the operation means for performing the operation for initializing the RAM 102 and the operation means for performing the setting value changing operation, thereby suppressing an increase in cost. it can.

  In addition, in this example, it is necessary to confirm the state of the clear switch multiple times when turning on the power to the gaming machine by using the clear switch also, so when turning on the power to the gaming machine, first turn on the clear switch. When the RAM clear flag is detected, the RAM clear flag is set. Thereafter, whether or not the clear switch for initializing the RAM 102 has been operated is checked to see if the RAM clear flag is set. The operation of the clear switch for the change operation can be suitably performed by checking the state of the clear switch itself.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
The normal initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1 process) is executed based on the operation means being operated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, while the power supply to the gaming machine is started. An initialization processing execution means (for example, a part for executing steps 012 IWS015 and S051 in the game control microcomputer 100) that executes initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 2 processing) at the time of abnormality based on the detection of the abnormality )When,
A first storage area (for example, a clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102) in which stored contents are cleared in the normal initialization process;
A second storage area (for example, a clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102) in which stored contents are cleared in the initialization process at the time of abnormality,
The specific information storage means can store specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102).
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
Based on the fact that the state of the operation means has been switched from the off state to the on state, it comprises determination means that can determine that the operation means has been operated (for example, a part for executing step 012IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 100),
The process execution means can change the setting value based on the determination that the operation means has been operated by the determination means in the setting value change process (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can change the setting value in step 012IWS041). If Y, execute step 012IWS042),
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means has been operated by setting an initial state of the operation means when power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100). Is executed in step 012IWS036 when N in step 012IWS036)
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention,
Timer interrupt processing execution means (for example, a part for executing steps S21 to S27 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a timer interrupt process each time a predetermined timer interrupt occurs,
The process execution means executes the process by using the specific information a plurality of times until the timer interrupt process is executed after power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (Steps 012IWS025, S034, and S048 are executed)
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 012IWS047 and S178 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. Prepared,
Suggestion production execution means
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) can be executed (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b). Steps 012 IWS 509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906)
The suggestion effect execution means includes:
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) Pre-implying effects, suggesting effects during games, and suggesting effects during big hits)
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b). (By executing steps 012IWS514, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, the suggestion effect in the game, and the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode are not executed)
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, Decline in interest can be prevented.

The feature unit 012IW includes the third invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for a player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60546. . Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2017-60546 describes that when the RAM clear switch is operated and the setting key switch is in the ON state, the initial setting 2 is executed and the lottery probability is changed. Further, it is described that the setting key switch is used to validate the setting switch, and a winning lottery probability of a special figure corresponding to the settings 1 to 3 indicated by the setting switch is set. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60546, a gaming machine configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is not always appropriate. Processing may not be possible. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for a player,
Operating means (for example, a clear switch);
Process execution means (for example, a game control microcomputer) capable of executing a set value change process for changing a set value based on the operation means being operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started The part that executes steps 012 IWS039 to S042 in 100),
Based on the fact that the state of the operation means has been switched from the off state to the on state, determination means capable of determining that the operation means has been operated (for example, a part for executing step 012IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 100). Prepared,
The processing execution means can change the setting value based on the determination that the operation means has been operated by the determination means in the setting value changing process (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can perform the step). When Y is 012IWS041, step 012IWS042 is executed)
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means has been operated by turning on the initial state of the operation means when the set value changing process is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has Step 012IWS037 is executed when it is N, Step 012IWS037 is executed)
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, the processing is preferably performed. It can be performed. That is, it is possible to prevent the setting value itself from being changed unintentionally even though the operation means (in this example, the clear switch) is continuously pressed, and the processing is preferably performed. It can be carried out.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention,
Specific information storage means (for example, RAM012IW122b) capable of storing specific information (for example, RAM clear flag) indicating that the operation means has been operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started,
When executing a plurality of processes including a set value changing process, the process executing means executes the process using the specific information a plurality of times (for example, executing steps 012IWS025, S034, and S048 in the game control microcomputer 100). Part to do)
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
The normal initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1 process) is executed based on the operation means being operated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, while the power supply to the gaming machine is started. An initialization processing execution means (for example, a part for executing steps 012 IWS015 and S051 in the game control microcomputer 100) that executes initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 2 processing) at the time of abnormality based on the detection of the abnormality )When,
A first storage area (for example, a clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102) in which stored contents are cleared in the normal initialization process;
A second storage area (for example, a clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102) in which stored contents are cleared in the initialization process at the time of abnormality,
The specific information storage means can store specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102).
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention,
First state storage means for storing the state of the previous operation means (for example, the previous clear switch buffer);
Second state storage means (for example, a clear switch buffer) for storing the current state of the operation means,
The determination means can determine that the operation means has been operated based on the stored content of the first state storage means being in an off state and the storage content of the second state storage means being in an on state ( For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 012IWS041),
The first state storage means stores the ON state as the state of the operation means for the first time when the set value change process is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 012IWS037).
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 012IWS047 and S178 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. Prepared,
Suggestion production execution means
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) can be executed (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b). Steps 012 IWS 509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906)
The suggestion effect execution means includes:
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) Pre-implying effects, suggesting effects during games, and suggesting effects during big hits)
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b). (By executing steps 012IWS514, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, the suggestion effect in the game, and the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode are not executed)
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, Decline in interest can be prevented.

The feature unit 012IW includes the following fourth invention. In other words, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and can be controlled in an advantageous state based on the set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and setting before and after the change obtained by the change stop command. Based on the value, it is described that display is performed by three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant and lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value designation command) is not normal. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) based on the setting operation. 012IWS042), and
Game control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 012 IWS047 and S178 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means (for example, second effect) capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) Steps 012 IWS 509 to S 515, S 704 to S 709, and S 901 to S 906 in the control CPU 012 IW 120 b)
When the set value information output from the information output unit is not normal, the suggestion effect executing unit is set to a predetermined set value having a low advantage for the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. For example, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes steps 012IWS512, S707, and S904).
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command at power-on and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 012IWS047 and S178. To do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the set value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest for the.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, or a big hit in the fourth effect mode as the suggestion effect). The suggestion effect) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit suggestion effect) that can be executed are low. It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect determination table, an in-game suggestion effect determination table, a big hit suggestion effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect. A suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, and S906 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b);
The suggestion effect determining means is
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the setting value storage area of the RAM012IW122b). Steps 012IWS510, S705, and S902 are executed based on the stored setting value),
When the set value information is not normally input, the execution mode of the suggested effect is determined using determination data according to a predetermined set value (for example, the set value “1”) (for example, second effect control). CPU 012IW120b executes steps 012IWS512, S707, and S904 based on the set value “1”)
However, according to such a configuration, an increase in data capacity can be prevented.

  In the feature part 012IW, “determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect” includes not only determining whether to execute the suggestion effect but also determining the effect mode of the suggestion effect. is there.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means at least in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed at different ratios according to the set value set (for example, the suggestion effect before game or It is described that it may be possible to execute an initial appearance effect, etc., and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the game is started, and the game is played from an early time zone. Can be motivated to improve the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from when the setting is changed until the variable display is executed 30 times)) after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-7 (A), (B), FIGS. 8-24 (A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a motivation to play a game during a predetermined period, and to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-24 (A), (B), etc.)
It is described that a notification means (for example, the portion where the second effect control CPU 012 IW 120 b executes step S 012 IWS 516) capable of notifying the information related to the suggested suggestion effect may be further provided. According to the above, suggestive effects executed in the past can be confirmed, and the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-26 (A), (B), etc.)
A predetermined effect (for example, an effect effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect). A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc .;
Restriction means for restricting execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 8-26 (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the fourth invention,
The setting suggestion execution means can execute the setting suggestion at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-26 (A), (B), etc.)
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggesting effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestive effect) It is described that it may be further provided with an accessory effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc., which are difficult to make. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the fourth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period, interval period, ending period, etc. during the big hit game) varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 8-6).
It is described that it is possible to do so, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the fourth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, the fluctuation time) regarding the variable display varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 8-8).
It is described that it is possible to do so, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 12 of the fourth invention,
An opening / closing body that can be opened and closed, and a regulating member (for example, a security cover 012IW500A / security cover 012IW500B / security cover 012IW500C) that can regulate an operation on the operation unit,
When the opening / closing body is closed, the restriction member maintains the restriction state in which the operation on the operation unit is restricted, and when the opening / closing body is opened, the restriction state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed). In the state in which the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500A is maintained in a state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 is restricted by the security cover 012IW500A. The control state is canceled, and the setting key 012IW051 is allowed to be operated (FIGS. 8-3, 8-4, and 8-44 to 8-47).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

The feature unit 012IW includes the fifth invention described below. In other words, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and can be controlled in an advantageous state based on the set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and setting before and after the change obtained by the change stop command. Based on the value, it is described that display is performed by three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant and lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value designation command) is not normal. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) based on the setting operation. 012IWS042), and
Game control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 012 IWS047 and S178 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means (for example, second effect) capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) Steps 012 IWS 509 to S 515, S 704 to S 709, and S 901 to S 906 in the control CPU 012 IW 120 b)
When the set value information output from the information output unit is not normal, the suggestion effect execution unit restricts execution of the suggestion effect (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines that N, When N in S708 and N in S905, the pre-game suggestion effect, the game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect are not executed)
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command at power-on and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 012IWS047 and S178. To do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the set value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest for the.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, or a big hit in the fourth effect mode as the suggestion effect). The suggestion effect) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit suggestion effect) that can be executed are low. It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means at least in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed at different ratios according to the set value set (for example, the suggestion effect before game or It is described that it may be possible to execute an initial appearance effect, etc., and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the game is started, and the game is played from an early time zone. Can be motivated to improve the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from when the setting is changed until the variable display is executed 30 times)) after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-7 (A), (B), FIGS. 8-24 (A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a motivation to play a game during a predetermined period, and to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-24 (A), (B), etc.)
It is described that a notification means (for example, the portion where the second effect control CPU 012 IW 120 b executes step S 012 IWS 516) capable of notifying the information related to the suggested suggestion effect may be further provided. According to the above, suggestive effects executed in the past can be confirmed, and the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-26 (A), (B), etc.)
A predetermined effect (for example, an effect effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect). A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc .;
Restriction means for restricting execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 8-26 (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the fifth invention,
The setting suggestion execution means can execute the setting suggestion at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-26 (A), (B), etc.)
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggesting effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestive effect) It is described that it may be further provided with an accessory effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc., which are difficult to make. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period, interval period, ending period, etc. during the big hit game) varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 8-6).
It is described that it is possible to do so, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, the fluctuation time) regarding the variable display varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 8-8).
It is described that it is possible to do so, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the fifth invention,
An opening / closing body that can be opened and closed, and a regulating member (for example, a security cover 012IW500A / security cover 012IW500B / security cover 012IW500C) that can regulate an operation on the operation unit,
When the opening / closing body is closed, the restriction member maintains the restriction state in which the operation on the operation unit is restricted, and when the opening / closing body is opened, the restriction state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed). In the state in which the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500A is maintained in a state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 is restricted by the security cover 012IW500A. The control state is canceled, and the setting key 012IW051 is allowed to be operated (FIGS. 8-3, 8-4, and 8-44 to 8-47).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

The feature unit 012IW also includes the sixth invention described below. In other words, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and can be controlled in an advantageous state based on the set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and setting before and after the change obtained by the change stop command. Based on the value, it is described that display is performed by three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant and lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value designation command) is not normal. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) based on the setting operation. 012IWS042), and
Game control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 012 IWS047 and S178 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means (for example, second effect) capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) Steps 012 IWS 509 to S 515, S 704 to S 709, and S 901 to S 906 in the control CPU 012 IW 120 b)
The suggestion effect execution means includes:
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) Pre-implying effects, suggesting effects during games, and suggesting effects during big hits)
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect without executing the first suggestion effect as the suggestion effect (for example, The second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes steps 012IWS514, S709, and S906, thereby not performing the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, the suggestion effect in the game, or the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode)
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command at power-on and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 012IWS047 and S178. To do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the set value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest for the.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, or a big hit in the fourth effect mode as the suggestion effect). The suggestion effect) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit suggestion effect) that can be executed are low. It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect determination table, an in-game suggestion effect determination table, a big hit suggestion effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect. A suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, and S906 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b);
The suggestion effect determining means is
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the setting value storage area of the RAM012IW122b). Steps 012IWS510, S705, and S902 are executed based on the stored setting value),
When the set value information is not normally input, using dedicated determination data (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the suggestion effect determination table during game, the big hit suggestion effect determination table), The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the suggestion effect determination table during game, and the suggestion effect determination table during jackpot) Steps 012 IWS514, S709, and S906 are executed)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in games.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means at least in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed at different ratios according to the set value set (for example, the suggestion effect before game or It is described that it may be possible to execute an initial appearance effect, etc., and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the game is started, and the game is played from an early time zone. Can be motivated to improve the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from when the setting is changed until the variable display is executed 30 times)) after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-7 (A), (B), FIGS. 8-24 (A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a motivation to play a game during a predetermined period, and to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-24 (A), (B), etc.)
It is described that a notification means (for example, the portion where the second effect control CPU 012 IW 120 b executes step S 012 IWS 516) capable of notifying the information related to the suggested suggestion effect may be further provided. According to the above, suggestive effects executed in the past can be confirmed, and the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-26 (A), (B), etc.)
A predetermined effect (for example, an effect effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect). A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc .;
Restriction means for restricting execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 8-26 (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the sixth invention,
The setting suggestion execution means can execute the setting suggestion at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-26 (A), (B), etc.)
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggesting effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestive effect) It is described that it may be further provided with an accessory effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc., which are difficult to make. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period, interval period, ending period, etc. during the big hit game) varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 8-6).
It is described that it is possible to do so, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, the fluctuation time) regarding the variable display varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 8-8).
It is described that it is possible to do so, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 12 of the sixth invention,
An opening / closing body that can be opened and closed, and a regulating member (for example, a security cover 012IW500A / security cover 012IW500B / security cover 012IW500C) that can regulate an operation on the operation unit,
When the opening / closing body is closed, the restriction member maintains the restriction state in which the operation on the operation unit is restricted, and when the opening / closing body is opened, the restriction state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed). In the state in which the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500A is maintained in a state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 is restricted by the security cover 012IW500A. The control state is canceled, and the setting key 012IW051 is allowed to be operated (FIGS. 8-3, 8-4, and 8-44 to 8-47).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

  Note that the feature unit 012IW is configured to be changeable into three types of effect modes A to C, and when controlled to the effect mode A, when the set value information is not normally input, If the suggestion effect is configured to be executed as being set to a predetermined set value having a low advantage for the player (configuration of the fourth invention described above) and is controlled in the effect mode B, the set value When the information is not normally input, it is configured to limit the execution of the suggestive effect (the configuration of the fifth invention described above). When the information is controlled to the effect mode C, the set value information is normally input. If not, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect is configured to be executable as the suggestion effect (configuration of the sixth invention described above). I can't catch it. For example, according to the gaming state, the control method according to any one of the fourth to sixth inventions may be used to switch the suggestion effect. In this case, for example, if the gaming state is the normal state, if the set value information is not normally input, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect as being set to a predetermined set value having a low advantage for the player. The configuration (the configuration of the fourth invention described above), and if the gaming state is the time-short state, the configuration value is limited so that the execution of the suggestion effect is limited when the set value information is not normally input. If the game state is a probable change state, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect when the set value information is not normally input ( (Structure of the above sixth invention)).

  Further, it is not necessary to configure the suggestion effect to be executable by all the control methods of the fourth to sixth inventions described above, and the suggestion effect is configured to be executable using only one of the control methods. Also good.

  In addition, the feature unit 012IW controls execution of the suggestion effect by the control method of the fourth to sixth inventions described above when the set value command itself cannot be received due to reasons such as missing or garbled data (suggestion) Although the case where the production is limited) is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the set value command is received but the received set value command is inconsistent, the suggestion effect may be limited. In this case, for example, every time a set value command is received, the set value indicated by the set value command received on the effect control means side is stored, and then when a new set value command is received, When the set value indicated by the received set value command does not match the previously stored set value, it is determined that a mismatch has occurred, and execution of the suggested effect is performed by the control method of the fourth to sixth inventions. You may make it control (a suggestion effect is restrict | limited).

  Further, the way of making the game different in each of the set values “1” to “3” is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, in the case of an odd-numbered set value such as the set value “1” or “3”, a long game occurs when a long game is likely to occur. It is configured so that the difference from the difficult time is large, and in the case of an even number setting value such as setting value “2”, it is configured so that the likelihood of the extended resort is relatively constant and does not change. A suggestion effect that suggests an odd number may be configured to be executable. In this case, when the set value command cannot be normally received, the execution of the suggestive effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number is controlled by the control method of the fourth to sixth inventions. It may be configured so as to restrict the suggestion effect.

The feature unit 012IW also includes the seventh invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestion of the set value is performed only during the variable display, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value,
The suggestion effect execution means at least in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed, suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect) depending on the set value that has been set A game machine characterized in that it can execute an initial appearance effect, etc., and according to this feature, the player is interested in the state of the game machine before the game starts, Can be motivated to improve the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of performance identification information (for example, decorative symbols),
The suggestion effect execution means displays a suggestion effect (for example, different identification information for effect depending on the set value set) in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed (for example, It is described that it may be possible to execute display of an odd-numbered initial appearance), and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect according to the set value when the power supply to the gaming machine is restored after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 8). (As shown in -21 (A) and (B), a pre-game suggestion effect determination table with different determination values is used)
It is described that it is possible to do so, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a specific suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during game play or a suggestion effect during jackpot) after the variable display is started,
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may be set to have a higher degree of reliability with respect to the suggested setting value than the suggestion effect, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

In addition, the feature part 012IW includes the following eighth invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has a problem that the motivation for playing the game cannot be given effectively and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value,
The suggestion effect execution means is set during a game at least after a set value is changed and a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from when the setting is changed until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses. The suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values being set (see, for example, FIGS. 8-7 (A), (B), FIGS. 8-24 (A), (B)).
According to this feature, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a predetermined period, and to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern;
Variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios depending on whether the set value is changed or not (for example, FIGS. 8-7 (A), ( B))
It is described that the variable display execution means may execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when the set value is not changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern;
Variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines any one of the plurality of variable display patterns at a different ratio between when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value. (For example, see FIGS. 8-7 (A), (B), etc.),
The variable display executing means can execute variable display using a common background image when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting means. However, according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is that a predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, the number of times of execution of reach effect or pseudo-continuous effect has reached a predetermined number of times, a specific super reach effect) Based on the fact that the announcement effect has been executed or the like, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, when a big hit occurs within a specific period, the indication effect during the big hit can be executed). (See A) and (B))
It is described that it is possible to do so, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature unit 012IW also includes the ninth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestion effect executed in the past cannot be confirmed and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value that has been set (for example, see FIGS. 8-24 (A), (B), etc.)
There is described a gaming machine characterized in that it is further provided with notifying means (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU 012 IW 120 b executes step S 012 IWS 516) capable of reporting information on the executed suggestive effect. According to the above, suggestive effects executed in the past can be confirmed, and the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
The notifying means can notify the number of times that the suggestive effect has been executed (for example, the portion where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516).
It is described that it is possible to do so, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the contents of the executed suggestion effect (for example, the portion where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516).
It is described that it is possible to do so, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
The notifying means can notify information related to the suggested presentation effect while waiting for a customer for which variable display is not being executed (for example, the portion where the second effect control CPU 012 IW 120 b executes step S 012 IWS 516).
It is described that it is possible to do so, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
Information generating means for generating information (for example, execution history information) related to the executed suggestion effect;
Image generating means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) from which the information can be read by the imaging device;
It is described that the specific image may be provided with display means (for example, the image display device 5) that displays the specific image in a form that can be captured by the imaging device. Can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature unit 012IW also includes the following tenth invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that if the setting suggestion effect becomes difficult to be recognized by another effect, the interest may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-26 (A), (B), etc.)
A predetermined effect (for example, an effect effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect). A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc .;
When the suggestion effect is executed, it further includes a restricting unit that restricts the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted). (See (D))
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the tenth invention,
The restricting means changes the execution timing of at least one of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect when the execution timing overlaps with the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect (for example, either one is executed during the fanfare period and the other is the ending) Change to run during the period)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
The restricting means prohibits execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, execution of the accessory effect is prohibited. See FIG. 8-26 (D). )
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the tenth invention,
When the suggestion effect is executed, the restricting means executes a predetermined effect in an effect mode in which the suggestion effect is not easily recognized (for example, the movable member 012IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from the normal mode (for example, suggesting during a big hit) Control so that it does not stop at the position where it overlaps the dialogue image by the production))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
Both the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect for displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5) include display on one display means (for example, the image display device 5),
It is described that the one display means may display the display related to the suggestive effect in preference to the display related to the predetermined effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. Can do.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature unit 012IW includes the following eleventh invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that there is a possibility that the interest may be reduced by executing a setting suggestion effect that is not preferable for the player. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eleventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
Setting suggestion execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value that has been set,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set values that have been set (see, for example, FIGS. 8-26 (A), (B), etc.)
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggesting effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestive effect) A gaming machine characterized in that it is further provided with a hard-working effect production, a light guide plate production, an error display, etc., and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eleventh invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute a predetermined notification (for example, an effect effect) for operating a movable member (for example, the movable member 012IW101). The production effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eleventh invention,
A light-transmitting light guide plate capable of transmitting light (for example, light guide plate 012IW103);
A light emitter provided so that light can be incident from an end face of the light guide plate,
The light guide plate is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects light incident on the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitter and emits the light to the front surface of the gaming machine,
The predetermined notification means can execute a predetermined notification (for example, a light guide plate effect) in which light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate to the front surface of the gaming machine by causing the light emitter to emit light. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the production effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eleventh invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification for displaying an error, and according to such a configuration, an error can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the eleventh invention,
The setting suggestion execution means is a first setting suggestion that suggests that the setting is set to the first set value (for example, a suggestion effect during the big hit of the first effect mode; see FIGS. 8-26 (A) and (B)). , A second setting suggestion that suggests that the second setting value, which is more advantageous for the player than the first setting value, is set (for example, a big hit suggestion effect in the third effect mode. FIG. 8-26 ( A) and (B)) can be executed,
The predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate when the first setting suggestion is executed than when the second setting suggestion is executed (see, for example, FIG. 8-26 (E)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the eleventh invention,
Setting suggestion setting means capable of setting a setting suggestion execution ratio (for example, a setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, operation means such as a push button 31B, operation means such as a switch provided in the gaming machine (management The user can change the settings related to the setting suggestion effect)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information,
A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-like or belt-like movable body) on which the identification information is arranged;
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the variable display of the first identification information after the set value is changed,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the variable display of the first identification information after the set value is changed. Decline in interest can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature unit 012IW also includes the following twelfth invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has a problem that there is a possibility that gambling is likely to be too high at a setting with a high advantage. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the twelfth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period, interval period, ending period, etc. during the big hit game) differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 8-6).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent the gambling ability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the twelfth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 8-6 (B)).
It is described that it is possible to do so, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the twelfth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that has been set (for example, see FIG. 8-6 (B)).
It is described that it is possible to do so, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the twelfth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 8-6 (B)).
It is described that it is possible to do so, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using gaming value,
A game value granting means for granting a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means has a first set value (for example, set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means to the magnitude of the game value used for the game than the first set value. It can be set to a second setting value (for example, setting value 1) in which the proportion occupied is high,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when the second set value is set than when the first set value is set (for example, FIGS. 8-6 (A) and (B)). reference)
It is described that it is possible to do so, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that there may be suggested effect execution means capable of executing an suggested effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a big hit) that suggests a set value that has been set during a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. Such a configuration can enhance the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the twelfth invention,
Providing production execution means capable of performing production,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, an interval effect, an ending effect, etc.) regardless of the set value that is set during a predetermined control period in the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be determined in advance according to the set value that has been set, and according to such a configuration, the joy is too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a plurality of advantageous states,
The game control means can be controlled to one of a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different ratios based on the set value that has been set,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the type of the advantageous state (for example, see FIG. 8-6 (B)).
It is described that it is possible to do so, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature unit 012IW includes the thirteenth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has a problem that there is a possibility that gambling is likely to be too high at a setting with a high advantage. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the thirteenth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set,
The predetermined control period (for example, the fluctuation time) regarding the variable display varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 8-8).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent the gambling ability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the thirteenth invention,
The variable display period varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 8-8).
It is described that it is possible to do so, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the thirteenth invention,
It is described that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may be different depending on the set value that has been set, and according to such a configuration, euphoria becomes too high. This can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the thirteenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using gaming value,
A game value granting means for granting a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means has a first set value (for example, set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means to the magnitude of the game value used for the game than the first set value. It can be set to a second setting value (for example, setting value 1) in which the proportion occupied is high,
The predetermined control period regarding the variable display is longer when the second set value is set than when the first set value is set (see, for example, FIG. 8-8).
It is described that it is possible to do so, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the thirteenth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period related to the variable display may be determined in advance according to the set value that has been set, and according to such a configuration, gambling becomes too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the thirteenth invention,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern;
Variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines any one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to a set value (for example, see FIG. 8-8).
It is described that it is possible to do so, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the thirteenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  In the feature unit 012IW, the case where the setting values can be set in three stages of setting values “1” to “3” has been shown. It may be configured to be settable to a value, or may be configured to be settable to a two-stage set value. In this case, for example, the setting value can be set to 6 levels. When the setting value is “1”, the expectation level (reliability) for the jackpot is the lowest, and when the setting value is “6”, the expectation level for the jackpot ( (Reliability) may be the highest.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General prize opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start opening Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player,
A storage area capable of storing information generated during the game;
History display means capable of displaying the history information of abnormalities related to games in an identifiable manner,
An initialization process execution means capable of executing an initialization process for initializing the storage contents of the storage area;
A setting change process executing means capable of executing a setting change process for changing a set value when the initialization process is executed;
The history display means includes
When the initialization process is executed and the setting change process is not executed, it is possible to specify that the initialization process has been executed.
When the initialization process and the setting change process are executed, it is possible to display that the setting change process has been executed without performing a display that can specify that the initialization process has been executed. A gaming machine characterized by

Images